PALI TEXT SOCIETY PALI-ENGLISH DICTIONARY RHYS DAVIDS

Discuss Anything and Everything about Buddhism

www.buddhistboards.com

Buddhist Boards

Downloaded from the Buddhist Boards information site. Please do not commercially redistribute this document nor take off the Buddhist Boards logo.

PALI TEXT SOCIETY PALIPALI-ENGLISH DICTIONARY RHYS DAVIDS

FOREWORD. It is somewhat hard to realize, seeing how important and valuable the work has been, that when ROBERT CAESAR CHILDERS published, in 1872, the first volume of his Pali Dictionary, he only had at his command a few pages of the canonical Pali books. Since then, owing mainly to the persistent labours of the Pali Text Society, practically the whole of these books, amounting to between ten and twelve thousand pages, have been made available to scholars. These books had no authors. They are anthologies which gradually grew up in the community. Their composition, as to the Vinaya and the four Nikyas (with the possible exception of the supplements) was complete within about a century of the Buddha's death; and the rest belong to the following century. When scholars have leisure to collect and study the data to be found in this preSanskrit literature, it will necessarily throw as much light on the history of ideas and language as the study of such names and places as are mentioned in it (quite incidentally) has already thrown upon the political divisions, social customs, and economic conditions of ancient India. Some of these latter facts I have endeavoured to collect in my Buddhist India; and perhaps the most salient discovery is the quite unexpected conclusion that, for about two centuries (both before the Buddha's birth and after his death), the paramount power in India was Kosala -- a kingdom stretching from Nepal on the North to the Ganges on the South, and from the Ganges on the West to the territories of the Vajjian confederacy on the East. In this, the most powerful kingdom in India; there had naturally arisen a standard vernacular differing from the local forms of speech just as standard English differs from the local (usually county) dialects. The Pali of the canonical books is based on that standard Kosala vernacular as spoken in the 6th and 7th centuries B. C. It cannot be called the literary form of that vernacular, for it was not written at all till long afterwards. That vernacular was the mother tongue of the Buddha. He was born in what is now Nepal, but was then a district under the suzerainty of Kosala and in one of the earliest Pali documents he is represented as calling himself a Kosalan. When, about a thousand years afterwards, some pandits in Ceylon began to write in Pali, they wrote in a style strikingly different from that of the old texts. Part of that difference is no doubt due simply to a greater power of fluent expression unhampered by the necessity of constantly considering that the words composed had to be learnt by heart. When the Sinhalese used Pali, they were so familiar with the method of writing on palmleaves that the question of memorizing simply did not arise. It came up again later. But none of the works belonging to this period were intended to be learnt. They were intended to be read. Page VI On the other hand they were for the most part reproductions of older material that had, till then, been preserved in Sinhalese. Though the Sinhalese pandits were writing in Pali, to them, of course, a dead language, they probably did their thinking in their own mother tongue. Now they had had then, for many generations, so close and intimate an intercourse with their Dravidian neighbours that Dravidian habits of speech had crept into Sinhalese. It was inevitable that some of the peculiarities of their own tongue, and especially these Dravidanisms, should have influenced their style when they wrote in Pali. It will be for future scholars to ascertain exactly how far this influence can be traced in the idioms and in the order of the arrangement of the matter of these Ceylon Pali books of the fifth and sixth centuries A. D. There is no evidence that the Sinhalese at that time knew Sanskrit. Some centuries afterwards a few of them learnt the elements of classical Sanskrit and very proud they were of it. They introduced the Sanskrit forms of Sinhalese words when writing high Sinhalese. And the authors of such works as the Dhvasa, the Saddhammopyana, and the Mahbodhivasa, make use of Pali words derived from Sanskrit <-> that is, they turned into Pali form certain Sanskrit words they found either in the Amara--koa, or in the course of their very limited reading, and used them as Pali. It would be very desirable to have a

list of such Pali words thus derived from Sanskrit. It would not be a long one. Here we come once more to the question of memory. From the 11th cent. onwards it became a sort of fashion to write manuals in verse, or in prose and verse, on such subjects as it was deemed expedient for novices to know. Just as the first book written in Pali in Ceylon was a chain of memoriter verses strung together by very indifferent Pali verses, so at the end we have these scarcely intelligible memoriter verses meant to be learned by heart by the pupils. According to the traditions handed down among the Sinhalese, Pali, that is, the language used in the texts, could also be called Mgadh. What exactly did they mean by that? They could not be referring to the Mgadh of the Prakrit grammarians, for the latter wrote some centuries afterwards. Could they have meant the dialect spoken in Magadha at the date when they used the phrase, say, the sixth century A. D.? That could only be if they had any exact knowledge of the different vernaculars of North India at the time. For that there is no evidence, and it is in itself very improbable. What they did mean is probably simply the language used by Asoka, the king of Magadha. For their traditions also stated that the texts had been brought to them officially by Asoka's son Mahinda; and not in writing, but in the memory of Mahinda and his companions. Now we know something of the language of Asoka. We have his edicts engraved in different parts of India, differing slightly in compliance with local varieties of speech. Disregarding these local differences, what is left may be considered the language of head--quarters where these edicts were certainly drafted. This Mgadh contains none of the peculiar characteristics we associate with the Mgadh dialect. It is in fact a younger form of that standard Kosalan lingua franca mentioned above. Now it is very suggestive that we hear nothing of how the king of Magadha became also king of Kosala. Had this happened quietly, by succession, the event would have scarcely altered the relation of the languages of the two kingdoms. That of the older and larger would still have retained its supremacy. So when the Scottish dynasty succeeded to the English throne, the two languages remained distinct, but English became more and more the standard. Page VII However this may be, it has become of essential importance to have a Dictionary of a language the history of whose literature is bound up with so many delicate and interesting problems. The Pali Text Society, after long continued exertion and many cruel rebuffs and disappointments is now at last in a position to offer to scholars the first instalment of such a dictionary. The merits and demerits of the work will be sufficiently plain even from the first fasciculus. But one or two remarks are necessary to make the position of my colleague and myself clear. We have given throughout the Sanskrit roots corresponding to the Pali roots, and have omitted the latter. It may be objected that this is a strange method to use in a Pali dictionary, especially as the vernacular on which Pali is based had never passed through the stage of Sanskrit. That may be so; and it may not be possible, historically, that any Pali word in the canon could have been actually derived from the corresponding Sanskrit word. Nevertheless the Sanskrit form, though arisen quite independently, may throw light upon the Pali form; and as Pali roots have not yet been adequately studied in Europe, the plan adopted will probably, at least for the present, be more useful. This work is essentially preliminary. There is a large number of words of which we do not know the derivation. There is a still larger number of which the derivation does not give the meaning, but rather the reverse. It is so in every living language. Who could guess, from the derivation, the complicated meaning of such words as conscience, emotion, disposition? The derivation would be as likely to mislead as to guide. We have made much progress. No one needs now to use the one English word desire as a translation of sixteen distinct Pali words, no one of which means precisely desire. Yet this was done in Vol. X of the Sacred Books of the East by MAX MLLER and FAUSBLL See Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS in J R A S., 1898, p. 58.. The same argument applies to as many concrete words as abstract ones. Here again we claim to have made much advance. But in either case, to wait for perfection would postpone the much needed dictionary to the Greek kalends. It has therefore been decided to proceed as rapidly as possible with the completion of this first edition, and to reserve the proceeds of the sale for the eventual issue of a second edition which shall come nearer to our ideals of what a Pali Dictionary should be. We have to thank Mrs. STEDE for valuable help in copying out material noted in my interleaved copy of Childers, and in collating indexes published by the Society; Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS for revising certain articles on the technical terms of psychology and philosophy; and the following scholars for kindly placing at our disposal the material they had collected for the now abandoned scheme of an international Pali Dictionary: Prof. STEN KONOW. Words beginning with S or H. (Published in J P T S. 1909 and 1907, revised by Prof. Dr. D. ANDERSEN). Dr. MABEL H. BODE. B, Bh and M.

Prof. DUROISELLE. K. Dr. W. H. D. ROUSE. C--. In this connection I should wish to refer to the work of Dr. EDMOND HARDY. When he died he left a great deal of material; some of which has reached us in time to be made available. He was giving his whole time, and all his enthusiasm to the work, and had he lived the dictionary would probably have been finished before the war. His loss was really the beginning of the end of the international undertaking. Anybody familiar with this sort of work will know what care and patience, what scholarly knowledge and judgment are involved in the collection of such material, in the sorting, the sifting and final arrangement of it, in the adding of cross references, in the consideration of etymological puzzles, in the comparison and correction of various or faulty readings, and in the verification of references given by others, or found in the indexes. For all this work the users of the Dictionary will have to thank my colleague, Dr. WILLIAM STEDE. It may be interesting to notice here that the total number of references to appear in this first edition of the new dictionary is estimated to be between one hundred and fifty and one hundred and sixty thousand. The Bavarian Academy has awarded to Dr. STEDE a personal grant of 3100 marks for his work on this Dictionary. Chipstead, Surrey. July, 1921. T. W. RHYS DAVIDS. A. List of the Chiefs Books consulted for Vocabulary (with Abbreviations). 1. PALI BOOKS. 1a Canonical. Anguttara--Nikya 5 vols. P T S. 1885<-> 1900 (A). Buddha--Vasa P T S. 1882 (Bu). Cariy--Piaka P T S. 1882 (Cp.). Dhammapada P T S. 1914 (Dh). Dhamma--Sangai P T S. 1885 (Dhs). Dgha--Nikya 3 vols. P T S. (D). Iti--vuttaka P T S. 1890 (It.). Kath--Vatthu 2 vols. P T S. 1894, 95 (Kvu). Khuddaka--Pha P T S. 1915 (Kh). Majjhima--Nikya 3 vols. P T S. 1887<-> 1902 (M). Niddesa I Mah 2 vols. P T S. 1916, 17 (Nd1). Niddesa II Culla P T S. 1918 (Nd2). Paisambhidmagga 2 vols. P T S. 1905, 1907 (Ps). Peta--Vatthu P T S. 1889 (Pv). Puggala--Paatti P T S. 1883 (Pug). Sayutta--Nikya 5 vols. P T S. 1884<-> 1898 (S). Sutta--Nipta P T S. 1913 (Sn). Thera--thergth P T S. 1883 (Th 1) & (Th 2). Udna P T S. 1885 (Ud). Vibhanga P T S. 1904 (Vbh). Vimna--Vatthu P T S. 1886 (Vv). Vinaya--Piaka 5 vols. London 1879<-> 83 (Vin). Apadna P.T.S. 1925 (Ap). Dukapahna, P.T.S. 1906 (Dukp). Tikapahna, 3 vols. P.T.S. 1921--23 (Tikp). 1b Post--Canonical.

Atthaslin, P T S. 1897 (DhsA). Buddhadatta's Manuals, P T S. 1915 (Bdhd). Dhvasa, J P T S. 1884 (Dvs). Dhammapada Commentary, 4 vols. P T S. 1906--14 (DhA). Dpavasa, London 1879 (Dpvs). Jtaka, 6 vols. London 1877--96 (J). Khuddaka--Pha Commentary, P T S. 1915 (KhA). Khuddhasikkh, J.T.P.S. 1883 (Khus). Mahvasa, P T S. 1908 (Mhvs). Mah--Bodhi--Vasa, P T S. 1891 (Mhbv). Milindapaha, London 1880 (Miln). Mlasikkh, J.P.T.S. 1883 (Mls). Netti--Pakaraa, P T S. 1902 (Nett). Paca--gati--dpana, J P T S. 1884 (Pgdp). Peta--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. 1894 (PvA). Puggala--Paatti Commentary, J P T S. 1914 (Pug A). Saddhammopyana, J P T S. 1887 (Sdhp). Sumangala--Vilsin, vol. I, P T S. 1886 (DA I). Manoratha--pra P.T.S. 1924 (AA); Samanta--psdik P.T.S. 1924 (Sam. Ps. or Vin A). Papaca Sdan, pt. I, P.T.S. 1922 (MA). Sammoha--Vinodan, P.T.S. 1923 (VbhA). Page X Sutta--Nipta Commentary, 2 vols. P T S. 1916--17 (SnA). Thergth Commentary, P T S. 1891 (ThA). Vimna--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. 1901 (VvA). Visuddhi--Magga, 2 vols. P T S. 1920<-> 21 (Vism). Yogvacara's Manual, P.T.S. 1896 (Yog). Note. The system adopted in quotations of passages from Pali text is that proposed in J P T S. 1909, pp. 385--87, with this modification that Peta--vatthu (Pv) is quoted by canto and verse, and Culla--Niddesa (Nd2) by number of word in "Explanatory Matter". 2. BUDDHIST SANSKRIT. Avadna--ataka, ed. J. S. Speyer (Bibl. Buddhica III), 2 vols., St. Ptersbourg 1906. (Av. .). Divyavadna, ed. Cowell & Neil, Cambridge 1886. (Divy). Jtaka--ml, ed. H. Kern (Harvard Or. Ser. I), Boston 1891. (Jtm). Lalita--vistara, ed. S. Lefmann, I. Halle 1902. (Lal. V.). Mah--vastu, ed. . Senart, 3 vols., Paris 1882--1897. (Mvst). ik--samuccaya. Ed. C. Bendall, St. Petersburg, 1902 (ik). The ed. of Lalitavistara which I have used, and from which I quote, is the Calcutta ed. (1877), by Rjendralla Mitra (Bibl. Indica), and not Lefmann's. 3. TRANSLATIONS. Buddh. Manual of Psychological Ethics (trsl. of the Dhamma--sangai) by Mrs. Rhys Davids (R. As. Soc. Trsl. Fund XII), London 1900. (Dhs trsl.). Compendium of Philosophy (trsl. of the Abhidhamm'attha--sangaha) by S. Z. Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1910. (Cpd.). Dialogues of the Buddha, trsl. by T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, London I. 1899; II. 1910; III. 1921. (Dial.). Expositor (trsl. of the Attha--slin), by Maung Tin, P T S. Trsl. 1920, 21.

Kathvatthu trsl. ("Points of Controversy), by Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1915. (Kvu trsl.). Kindred Sayings (Sayutta Nikya I), by Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1917. (K S.). Mahvasa trsl. by W. Geiger, P T S. Trsl. 1912. Manual of a Mystic (Yogavacara), trs. by F. L. Woodward, P T S. Trsl. 1916. (Mystic). Neumann, K. E., Lieder der Mnche und Nonnen, Berlin 1899. Psalms of the Brethren (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1913. Psalms of the Sisters (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1909. Questions of Milinda (trsl. T. W. Rhys Davids), S B E. vols. 35, 36. (Miln). Vinaya Texts (trsl. Rhys Davids & Oldenberg), S B E. vols. 13, 17, 20. (Vin T.). Neumann, Die Reden Gotamo Buddha's (Mittlere Sammlung), Vols. I to III2 1921. Human Types, P.T.S. trsl. 1924 (Pug trsl.) and insert accordingly on p. xi under B 1. Path of Purity, P.T.S. trsl. 1923, 1st pt. (Vism. Trsl.). 4. GRAMMATICAL & OTHER LITERATURE; PERIODICALS, ETC. Abhidhnappadpik, ed. W. Subhti, Colombo1 1883. (Abhp.). Andersen, D., A Pli Reader, 2 pts; Copenhagen 1901, 1907. Aufrecht, Th., Halyudha's Abhidhna--ratna--m, London 1861. Brugmann, K., Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogerm. Sprachen, Strassburg 1902. Childers, R. C., A Dictionary of the Pli Language, London 1874. Brhmaa (Br.). Dhtupha & Dhtumajs, ed. Andersen & Smith, Copenhagen 1921 (Dhtp, Dhtm). atapatha--Brhmaa (trsl. J. Eggeling) (at. Br.) SBE vols. Page XI Geiger, W., Pli Literatur und Sprache, Strassburg 1916. (Geiger, P. Gr.). Grassmann, W., Wrterbuch zum Rig Veda, Leipzig 1873. Journal of the American Oriental Society (J A O S.). Journal Asiatique, Paris (J. As.) Journal of the Pli Text Society (J P T S.). Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, London (J R A S.). Kaccyana--ppakaraa, ed. & trsl. Senart (J. As. 1871) (Kacc). Kern, H., Toevoegselen op 't Woordenboek van Childers; 2 pts (Verhandelingen Kon. Ak. van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam N. R. XVI, 5), Amsterdam 1916. (Toev.). Kuhn's Zeitschrift fr vergleichende Sprachforschung (K Z.). Mahvyutpatti, ed. Mironow (Bibl. Buddhica XIII) St. Ptersbourg 1910, 11. (Mvyut). Mller, Ed., Simplified Grammar of the Pali Language, London 1884. Trenckner, V., Notes on the Milindapaho, in J P T S. 1908, 102 sq. Uhlenbeck, H., Kurzgefasstes Etym. Wrterbuch d. Altindischen Sprache, Amsterdam 1898. Walde, A., Lateinisches Etymologisches Wrterbuch, Heidelberg2 1910. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft, Leipzig 1847 sq. (Z D M S.). Kirfel, W. Kosmographie der Inder, Bonn & Leipzig 1920. B. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 1. Titles of Books (the no. refers to section of A). A Anguttara . . . . . . 1a Abhp Abhidhnappadpik. . . 4 Ap Apadna. . . . . . . 1a Av. . Avadna--ataka . . . . 2

Bdhd Buddhadatta . . . . . 1 Brethren: see Psalms. . . . . . 3 Bu Buddha--vasa . . . . . 1a Cp Cariy--piaka . . . . . 1a Cpd Compendium . . . . . 3 D Dgha. . . . . . . . 1a Dvs Dh--vasa . . . . . 1b Dh Dhammapada . . . . . 1a Dhs Dhammasangai . . . . 1a Dhs trsl. Atthaslin . . . . . . 3 Dial. Dialogues . . . . . . 3 Divy Divyavadna . . . . . 2 Dpvs Dpavasa . . . . . . 1b Halyudha: see Aufrecht . . . . 4 It Itivuttaka . . . . . . 1a J Jtaka . . . . . . . 1b J A O S. Journal Amer. Or. Soc. . 4 J As. Journal Asiatique. . . . 4 J P T S. Journal Pli Text Soc. . 4 J R A S. Journal Royal Asiatic Soc. 4 Jtm Jtakaml . . . . . . 2 Kacc Kaccyana . . . . . . 4 Kh Khuddakapha . . . . 1a K S Kindred Sayings. . . . 3 Kvu Kathvatthu . . . . . 1a K Z Kuhn's Zeitschrift . . . 4 Lal. V. Lalita Vistara. . . . . 2 M Majjhima . . . . . . 1a Mhbv Mahbodhi--vasa. . . . 1b Mhvs Mahvasa . . . . . . 1b Miln Milinda--paha . . . . . 1b M Vastu Mah--vastu . . . . . . 2 Mvyut Mahvyutpatti. . . . . 4 Mystic: see Manual . . . . . . 3 Nd1 Mahniddesa . . . . . 1a Nd2 Cullaniddesa . . . . . 1a Nett Netti--pakaraa. . . . . 1b Pgdp Pacagati--dpana . . . . 1b Ps Paisambhid--magga. . . 1a Pug Puggala--paatti . . . . 1a Pv Petavatthu . . . . . . 1a S Sayutta. . . . . . . 1a S B E Sacred Books of the East. 3 Sdhp Saddhammopyana . . . 1b ik iksamuccaya . . . . 2 Sisters: see Psalms . . . . . . 3 Sn Sutta--nipta . . . . . 1a Th 1 Theragth. . . . . . 1a Th 2 Thergth . . . . . . 1a Toev. Toevoegselen . . . . . 4

BR. Boehtlingk and Roth. Dhtm Dhtumajsa . . . 4. Dhtp Dhtupha . . . 4. Dukp =Dukapahna . . . 1a. Pah =Pahna: see Duka & Tika . . . 1a. Tikp =Tikapahna . . . 1a. VbhA =Sammoha--Vinodan . . . 1b. Vism. Trsl. =Path of Purity . . . 3. age XII Ud Udna . . . . . . . 1a Vbh Vibhanga . . . . . . 1a Vin Vinaya . . . . . . . 1a Vism Visuddhi--magga . . . . 1b Vv Vimnavatthu . . . . . 1a Z D M G. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft. . . . . . . . 4 2. General & grammatical terms. A in combn with a Titleletter (e.g. DhA)=Commentary (on Dh). abl. ablative abs. absolute(ly) abstr. abstract acc. accusative act. active add. addition adj. adjective adv. adverb Ags. Anglo--Saxon aor. aorist appl. applied art. article attr. attribute Av. Avesta BB Burmese MSS bef. before BSk. Buddhist Sanskrit C (& Cy) Commentary (when cited in expln of a Text passage). caus. causative cert. certain coll. collective combd, combn combined, combination comp. comparative, comparison, composition cond. conditional cons. consonant corr. correct(ed) correl. correlation, correlative cp. compare cpd. compound dat. dative

den. denominative der. derived, derivation des. desiderative dial. dialect(ical) diff. different dist. distinct, distinguished E. English e. g. for instance encl. enclitic ep. epithet esp. especially etym. etymology exc. except excl. exclamation, exclusive expl. explanation, explained f. feminine fig. figurative(ly) foll. following form. formation fr. from freq. frequently, frequentative fut. future Gall. Gallic gen. genitive ger. gerund Ger. German Goth. Gothic Gr. Greek gram. grammar, atical grd. gerundive ibid. at the same passage id. the same id. p. identical passage i. e. that is i. g. in general imper. imperative impers. impersonal impf. imperfect Ind. Index ind. indicative indecl. indeclinable indef. indefinite inf. infinitive instr. instrumental interr. interrogative intrs. intransitive iter. iterative Lat. Latin l. c. loco citato lit. literal(ly), literary

Lit. Lithuanian loc. locative m. masculine med. medium (middle) N. Name n. noun, note nom. nominative Np. Name of person Npl. Name of place nt. neuter num. numeral Obulg. Old--bulgarian Ohg. Old--high--german Oicel. Old--icelandic Oir. Old--irish onom. onomatopoetic opp. opposed, opposite ord. ordinal, ordinary orig. original(ly) P. Pli part. particle Page XIII pass. passive perf. perfect pers. personal pl. plural pop. popular poss. possessive pot. potential pp. past participle ppr. present participle prec. preceding pred. predicative pref. prefix prep. preposition pres. present pret. preterite Prk. Prkrit prob. probably pron. pronoun pt. part P T S. Pli Text Society q. v. quod vide (which see) ref. reference, referred refl. reflexive rel. relation, relative sep. separate(ly)

sg. singular Sk. Sanskrit sq. and following SS. Singhalese MSS. ster. stereotype suff. suffix sup. superlative s. v. sub voce (under the word mentioned) syn. synonym(ous) T. Text trans. transitive trsl. translated, translation t. t. technical term t. t. g. technical term in grammar v. verse var. variant, various var. lect. various reading voc. vocative Wtb. Wrterbuch 3. Typographical. *(s)qel indicates a (reconstructed or conjectured) Indogermanic root. *Sk means, that the Sanskrit word is constructed after the Pli word; or as Sk. form is only found in lexicographical lists. a: the cap over a vowel indicates that the is the result of a syncope a + a (e. g. khuddanukhudda), whereas represents the proper , either pure or contracted with a preceding a (khsava = kha + sava). represents the head--word either as first (--) or second (--) part of a compound; sometimes also an easily supplemented part of a word. > indicates an etymological relation or line of development between the words mentioned. and means "at similar" or "at identical, parallel passages". The meaning of all other abbreviations may easily be inferred from the context. A A--1 A--1 the prep. shortened before double cons., as akkosati ( + kru), akkhti ( + khy), abbahati ( + bh). -- Best to be classed here is the a-- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of -- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for --nantaka = nantaka) Vv.807; amajjapa (for --majjapa = majjapa) J VI.328; ampaya (for mpaya = mpaya) J VI.518; apassato (= passantassa) J VI.552. A--2 (an-- before vowels) [Vedic a--, an--; Idg. *n, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. a), a)n--; Lat. *en--, in--; Goth., Ohg. & Ags. un--; Oir. an--, in--] neg. part. prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1), whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms. In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e. g. appaicchavin). In meaning it equals na--, nir-- and vi--. Often we find it opp. to sa--. Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding. -- Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.) --a-- (a) in redupl. formations like bhava--bhava see 4. A--3

A--3 [Vedic a--; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. aya; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp. Sk sma); Gr. e)--; also in Gr. e)kei_, Lat. equidem, enim] the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond. tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja. Identical with this a-- is the a-- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q. v.). A--4 A--4 the sound a (a--kra) J VI.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311. Asa1 Asa1 [Vedic asa; cp. Gr. w)_mos, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. ase karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J I.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. sa in kohsa and expln of asa as kohsa at DA I.312, also v. l. mettsa for mettasa at It 22). -- att'ase in former times, formerly D II.224; Th 2, 314. mettasa sharing friendship (with) A IV.151 = It 22 = J IV.71 (in which connection Miln 402 reads ahis). -- Disjunctive ekena asena . . . ekena asena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A I.61. From this: ekasa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayasa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidh): see ekasa. -- paccasena according to each one's share A III.38. puasena with a knapsack for provisions D I.117; A II 183; cp. DA I.288, with v. l. puosena at both passages. --ka "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin III.127; DhA III.214; IV.136; VvA 121. -- vaaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kyabandhana; vv. ll. vaddhaka, bandhaka) Vin I.204 (T. bandhaka); II.114 (ddh); IV.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. bandhana, C. v. l. vaaka); DhA III.452. Asa2 Asa2 [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e. g. catur four--cornered, cha, ah, soas etc. (q. v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. DhsA 317). In connection with a Vimna: yat with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriagepole Vv 642 (= kubbara--phale patihit hehima--as VvA 265). Asi (f.) [cp. Vedic ari, ara, aani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cu/s sharp: Lat. cer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under cer] a corner, edge (= asa2) Vv 782 (= asa--bhga VvA 303). Asu [cp. Sk. au (Halyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin III.224. --mlin, sun Ssv 1. Akaa (adj.) [a + kaa] not made, not artificial, natural; ysa natural juice Vin I.206. Akampiyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln 354. Akalu (cp. agalu) an ointment J IV.440 (akalu candana ca, v. l. BB aggalu; C. expls as klakalu ca rattacandana ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); VI.144 (candana--vilitta; v. l. BB aggalu); Miln 338 ( tagara--tlsaka--lohita--candana). Akca (adj.) [a + kca] pure, flawless, clear D II.244; Sn 476; J V.203. Akcin (adj.) = akca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkcin (= Sk. arka--arcin shining as the sun), but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading. Aksiya (adj. --n.) [a + ksika?] "not from the Ks--country" (?); official name of certain tax--gatherers in the king's service J VI.212 (aksiya--sankht rja--puris C.).

Akiccakra (adj.) [a + kicca + kra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A II.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA I.296. -- 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151. Akiriya (adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J III.530 (rpa = akattabba--rpa C.); Miln 250. Akilsu (adj.) [a + kilsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S I.47; V.162; J I.109; Miln 382. Akissava at S I.149 is probably faulty reading for akicana. Akutobhaya (adj.) see ku. Akuppa (adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu III.200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast, safe Vin I.11 (akupp me ceto--vimutti) = S II.239; Vin II.69; IV.214; D III.273; M I.205, 298; S II.171; A III.119, 198; Miln 361. Akuppat (f.) [abstr. fr. last] "state of not being shaken", surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbna Th 1, 364. Akka [cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow--wort M I.429 (assa jiy bowstrings made from that plant). --nla a kind of dress material Vin I.306 (vv. ll. agga & akkha). --va a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin II.154 (cp. akkha--va). Akkanta [pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A I.8; J I.71; Miln 152; DhA I.200. Akkandati [ + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S IV.206. Akkamana (nt.) [cp. BSk. kramaa Jtm 3158] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J I.62. Akkamati [ + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J I.7, 279; ThA 9; -- to rise Vin III. 38. -- ger. akkamma Cp. III.72. -- pp. akkanta (q. v.). Akkuha (adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthhi abhisatto SnA 364); J VI.187. -- 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuha--vandita Sn 702 (= akkosa--vandana SnA 492) Th 2, 388 (expln ThA 256 as above). Akkula (adj.) [= kula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See kula. Akkosa [ + kru = kruc, see kuca & koca2; to sound, root kr, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn 623; Miln 8 (+ paribhsa); SnA 492; ThA 256; PvA 243; DhA II.61. --vatthu always as dasa a--vatthni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J I.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA I.212; IV.2. Akkosaka (adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhsaka A II.58; III.252; IV.156; V.317; PvA 251. Akkosati [to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J I.191; II.416; III.27; DhA I.211; II.44. Often combd with paribhsati, e. g. Vin II.296; DhA IV.2; PvA 10. -- aor. akkocchi Dh 3; J III.212 (= akkosi DhA I.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. VI.417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pli--gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. 164). --pp. akkuha (q. v.). Akkha1

Akkha1 [Vedic aka; Av. aa; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D II.96; S V.6; A I.112; J I.109, 192; V.155 (akkhassa phalaka yath; C.: suvaaphalaka viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln 27 (+ s + cakka), 277 (atibhrena sakaassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA 277. --akkha abbhajati to lubricate the axle S IV.177; Miln 367. --chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S I.57; Miln 67. --bhagga with a broken axle J V.433. --bhajana the breaking of the axle DhA I.375; PvA 277. Akkha2 Akkha2 [Vedic aka, prob. to aki & Lat. oculus, "that which has eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. lea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D I.6 (but expld at DA I.86 as ball--game: guaka); S I.149 = A V.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto aya kali yo akkhesu dhanaparjayo); J I.379 (k a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J V.116 (C.: ajtakara). Cp. also accha3. --dassa (cp. Sk. akadaraka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin III.47; Miln 114, 327, 343 (dhamma--nagare). --dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D II.348; III.183; M III.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta & surdhutta). --va fence round an arena for wrestling J IV.81. (? read akka--). Akkha3 Akkha3 (adj.) (--) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha). Prob. akkhaa is connected with akkha. Akkhaka [akkha1 + ka] the collar--bone Vin IV.213 (adhakkhaka); Y.216. Akkhaa [a + khaa, BSk. akaa Av I.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at D III.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D III.287; VvA 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaa. --vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaa = vijju). In var. combns.; mostly as dureptin a. A I.284 (+ mahato kyassa padlet); II.170 sq. (id.), 202; IV.423, 425; J II.91 (expld as either "avirdhita<11>--vedh" or "akkhaa vuccati vijju": one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), III.322; IV.494 (C. explns aviraddha--vedhin vijju--lokena vijjhana<11>--samattha p. 497). In other combn at J I.58 (akkhaavedhin + vlavedhin); V.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vlavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin). In BSk. we find akuavedha (a Sanskritised Pli form, cp. Mathur kua = Sk. kaa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with drevedha), where MSS. however read ak<-> ua; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as "an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark" (Schiefner gives "Streifschuss"). Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning "hitting the centre of the target" (i. e. its "eye") (cp. E. bull's eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like "hitting without mishap", in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an--; akkhaa in the meaning of "lightning" (J II.91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence. Akkhata (adj.) [pp. of a + kan, cp. parikkhata1] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). -- acc. akkhata (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccgamu Paliputta akkhata) & Pv IV.111 (nessmi ta Paliputta akkhata); see VvA 351 & PvA 272. Akkhaya (adj.) [a + khaya, ki] not decaying, in akkhayapaibhna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21. Akkhara (adj.) [Vedic akara] constant, durable, lasting D III.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D I.88) it

is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkh (DA I.247 = SnA 477) <-> pl. nt. akkharni sounds, tones, words. citt'akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A I.72 = III.107 = S II.267. Akkharni are the sauce, flavour (vyajana) of poetry S I.38. To know the context of the a the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh 352 (C. is ambiguous DhA IV.70). Later: akkhara a syllable or sound PvA 280 (called sadda in next line); akkharni an inscription J II.90; IV.7 (likhitni written), 489; VI.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1. --cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA 120. --pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D I.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkh ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA i.247) = A III.223 = Sn p. 105. --pida "word--ball", i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA IV.70 (= akkharna sannipto Dh 352). Akkharik (f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one's back). D I.7; Vin II.10; III.180. So expld at DA I.86. It may be translated "letter game"; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables. Akkhta (adj.) [pp. of akkhti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A I.34 (dur); II.195; IV.285, 322; V.265, 283; Sn 172, 276, 595, 718. Akkhtar one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story--teller S I.11, 191; III.66; Sn 167. Akkhti [ + khy, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. khyti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nne/pw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn 87, 172; imper. akkhhi Sn 988, 1085; aor. akkhsi Sn 251, 504, 1131 (= cikkhi etc. Nd2 465); fut. akkhissati Pv IV.163; cond. akkhissa Sn 997; J VI.523. -- Pass. akkhyati to be proclaimed, in phrase agga a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln 118, 182 (also in BSk. agram khyyate M Vastu III.390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S I.11; It 53. -- pp. akkhta (q. v.). -- Intensive or Frequentative is cikkhati. Akkhna (nt.) [Sk. khyna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D I.6 (= DA I.84: Bhrata--Rmyandi); III.183; M I.503; III.167; Sdhp. 237. -- preaching, teaching Nd1 91 (dhamm). The 5th Veda J V.450. (vedam akkhnapacama; C: itihsapacama vedacatukka). -- The spelling khyna also occurs (q. v.). Akkhyika (adj.) relating, narrating J III.535; lokakkhyik kath talk about nature--lore D I.8; Miln 316. Akkhyin (adj.) telling, relating, announcing S II.35; III.7; J III.105. Akkhi (nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. kate, kaa, pratka, anka; Gr. o)/sse, w)/y (*ku/klwy), o)fqalmo/s, pro/swpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. owan (= E eye & wind--ow); Goth. augo. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2 & ikkhaika] the eye M I.383 (ubbhatehi akkhhi); Sn 197, 608; J I.223, 279; V.77; VI.336; Pv II.926 (akkhni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA 123); VvA 65 (ni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhni me dhmyanti DhA I.475; DhA II.26; III.196 ( ni ummletv opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, 380. -- In combn with sa-- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. (--) akkha3 (q.v.). --ajana eye ointment, collyrium DhA III.354. --kpa the socket of the eye J IV.407. --gada eye--protuberance, i. e. eye--brow (?) J VI.504 (for pamukha T.). --gtha secretion from the eye PvA 198. --gthaka id. Sn 197 (= dvhi akkhicchiddehi apanta--ttaca--masasadiso a--gthako SnA 248). --chidda the eye--hole SnA 248. --dala the eye--lid DA I.194; ThA 259; DhsA 378. --pta "fall of the eye", i. e. a look, in mand of soft looks (adj.) PvA 57. --pra an eye--full, in akkhipra assu (assu?) an eye full of tears J VI.191. --mala dirt from the eye Pv III.53 (= gtha C.). --roga eye disease DhA I.9. Akkhika1 Akkhika1 (--) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th 1,960 (ajan with eyes anointed); DhA IV.98 (addh with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 (tamb red--eyed). --an having no eyes DhA I.11.

Akkhika2 Akkhika2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. aka] the mesh of a net J I.208. --hraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M I.383 (corresp. with adahraka). Akkhitta1 Akkhitta1 see khitta. Akkhitta2 Akkhitta2 (adj.) [BSk kipta Divy 363, pp. of + kip] hit, struck, thrown J III.255 (= kaddhita C.). Akkhin (adj.) = akkhika J III.190 (mand softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb red--eyed); DhA I.11. Akkhobbha (adj.) [a + kubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21. Akkhobhana (adj) = akkhobbha J V.322 (= khobhetun na sakkh C.). Akkhohi (f.) [= akkhobhi] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J V.319; VI.395. Akhadaphulla see khada. Akhta (adj.) not dug: see khta. Akhetta barren--soil: see khetta. -- In cpd. u the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J IV.371. Agati see gati. --gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D III.228 (4: chanda, dosa moha bhaya); A II.18 sq., J IV.402; V.98, 510; PvA 161. Agada [Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counterpoison J I.80 (haraka); Miln 121, 302, 319, 334; DA I.67; DhA I.215; PvA 198 (= osadha). Agaru (adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S I.94, 229; II.90) Vin. I.25; IV.17, D I.51; DhA I.39. -- (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D I.89; Sn p. 51. Agalu [cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahlm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lo/h & a)ga/lloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = VvA 237 agalugandha); VvA 158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. I.24, and akalu. Agra (nt.) [cp. Sk. agra, probably with the a-- of communion; Gr. a)gei(rw to collect, a)gora/ market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha1]. -- 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagriy. -- Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassu ohretv ksyni vatthni acchdetv agrasm anagriya pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state" D I.60 etc.; cp. Nd2 172II. See also S I.185 (agrasm anagriya nikkhanta); M II.55 (agra ajjhvasat); Sn 274, 805 ( vasati), and with pabbajita D I.89, 115, 202, 230; Pv II.1317. -- (b.) of a "rj cakkavattin" compared with a "sambuddha": sace agra vasati vijeyya pahavi ima adadena asatthena . . . sace ca so pabbajati agr anagriya vivaacchado sambuddho arah bhavissati "he will become the greatest king when he

stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life", the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D II.16; Sn 1002, 1003. -- Further passages for agra e. g. Vin I.15; D I.102 (BB. has v. l. agyagra, but DA I.270 expl. as dnagra); A I.156, 281; II.52 sq.; Dh 14, 140; J I.51, 56; III.392; Dpvs. I.36. -- 2. anagra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaha) Sn 628 = Dh 404; Sn 639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv II.25 (= anvsa PvA 80). -- (nt.) the homeless state (= anagriy) Sn 376. See also agga2. -- 3. gra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in gra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agra. This however is wrong. The long is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agra. Of the cpds. the most common are: -- gantuk reception hall for strangers or guests S IV.219; V.21. -- itth lady's bower S I.58, 89. -- k a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S II.103. 263; III.156; IV.186; V.43; A I.230; III.10, 364; IV.231; V.21. --koh storehouse, granary D I.134 (cp. DA I.295); S I.89. --ti a house covered with grass S IV.185; A I.101. --bhus threshing shed, barn A I.241. --santh a council hall D I.91; II.147; S IV.182; V.453; A II.207; IV.179 sq. --su an uninhabited shed; solitude S V.89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A I.241 (v. l. for bhusagra); III.353; IV.139, 392, 437; V.88, 109, 323 sq. Agraka (nt.) [fr. agra] a small house, a cottage M I.450; J VI.81. Agrika (adj.) 1. having a house, in eka, dva etc. D I.166 = A I.295 = II.206. -- 2. a householder, layman Vin I.17. f. agrik a housewife Vin I.272. See also grika. Agrin (adj.) [fr. agra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn 376, Th I,1009; J III.234. -- f. agrin a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassmm VvA 225); Pv III.43 (id. PvA 194). a layman M I.504 (bhta). -- Usually in neg. anagriy (f.) the homeless state (= anagra) as opp. to agra (q. v.) in formula agrasm anagriya pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin I.15; M I.16; II.55, 75; A I.49; D III.30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn 274, 1003; Pv II.1316; DA I.112. Agga1 Agga1 (adj. n.) [Vedic agra; cp. Av. agro first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs IV.13 (sangaha first collection). See cpds. -- (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J I.52 (skh). -- (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin IV.232 (agga--m--agga) most excellent, D II.4: S I.29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A II.17 = Pv IV.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: agga] pavuccati); It 88, 89; Sn 875 (suddhi); PvA 5. Often combd. with seha (best), e. g. D II.15; S III.83, 264. -- 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always --); as r point of an awl Sn 625, 631; Dh 401; kus tip of a blade of grass Dh 70; Sdhp 349; ti id PvA 241; dum top of a tree J II.155; dhaj of a banner S I.219; pabbat of a mountain Sdhp 352; skh of a branch PvA 157; etc. -- (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S II.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as --; e. g. dum the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan plenty D III.164; madhur S I.41, 161, 237; bhav the best existence S III.83; rp extraordinary beauty J I.291; lbh highest gain J III.127; sambodhi--y--agga highest wisdom Sn 693 (= sabbauta--an SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first--fruits (panca aggni, after which the N. Pacaggadyaka), viz. khettaggan rs koh kumbhi bhojan SnA 270. sukh perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase agga akkhyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D I.124; S III.156, 264; A II.17 (Tathgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2 517 D (appamdo); Miln 183. -- 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin II.167. (aggena gahti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh from alms); Vbh 423 (vass by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A II.201 (opp. mle at the root); J IV.156 (id.); Sn 233 (phusit with flowers at the top: supupphitaggaskh KhA 192); J II.153 (ukkh); III.126 (kp). -- 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad (foll. by tad) from what time, since what date D I.152; II.206; & ajja--t--agge from this day, after today D I.85; M I.528; A V.300; Sn p. 25 (cp. BSk. adygrena Av. II.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin II.212.

--angul the main finger, i. e. index finger J VI.404. --sana main seat DA I.267. --upahka chief personal attendant D II.6. --krik first taste, sample Vin III.80. --kulika of an esteemed clan Pv III.55 (= seh PvA 199). --a recognized as primitive primeval, D III.225 (pora +), A II.27 sq.; IV.246, Kvu 341. --danta one who is most excellently self--restrained (of the Buddha) Th I.354. --dna a splendid gift Vin III.39. --dvra main door J I.114. --nakha tip of the nail Vin IV.221. --nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin I.229. --nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343. --nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs IV.5. --pakatimant of the highest character J V.351 (= aggasabhva). --patta having attained perfection D III.48 sq. --pasda the highest grace A II.34; It 87. --pida the best oblation or alms I.141; M I. 28; II.204. --pidika receiving the best oblations J VI.140. --puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684; DhA II.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. --purohita chief or prime minister J VI.391. --phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J I.148; Pv IV.188; PvA 230. --bja having eggs from above (opp. mla), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D I.5; DA I.81. --magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. --mahesi the king's chief wife, queen--consort J I.262; III.187, 393; V.88; DhA I.199; PvA 76. --rj the chief king J VI.391; Miln 27. --vara most meritorious, best Dpvs VI.68. --vda the original doctrine (= theravda) Dpvs IV.13. --vdin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142. Agga2 Agga2 (nt.) (only --) [a contracted form of agra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dn a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J III.470; IV.379, 403; VI.487; PvA 121; Miln 2. salk a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J I.123, VvA 75. Aggat (f.) [abstr. of agga] pre--eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 ( gata); Dpvs IV.1 (guaggata gat). -(adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D I.80; III.224. Aggatta (nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, pre--eminence PvA 9, 89. Aggavant (adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A I.70, 243. Aggalu see agalu. Aggaa & Agga (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argal to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakati to protect, Gr. a)le/cw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a)rke/w = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross--bar Vin I.290; D I.89 ( kotei to knock upon the cross--bar; a. = kava DA I.252); A IV.359 (id.); S. IV.290; A I.101 = 137 = IV.231. (phusit with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin IV.47; J. V.293 ( uppeti to lift up the cross--bar. -- 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin I.290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV VIII.21, 1); J I.8 (+ tunna) VI.71 ( datv); Vin IV.121. --dna putting in a gusset J I.8. --phalaka the post or board, in which the cross--bar is fixed (cp. vai) M III.95. --vai = phalaka Vin II.120, 148. --sci bolting pin M I.126. Aggi [Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. -- 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin II.120 (fire in bathroom); M I.487 (anhro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S IV.185, 399 (sa--updno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA III.71); J I.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); II.102; III.55; IV.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi tpana + udake temana). -- The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A IV.45: aggi ujjleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggi jleti (kindle) J II.44; gahti (make or take) J I.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J I.294; nibbpeti (put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbyati the f. goes out S II.85; M I.487; J I.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. nibbna) J I.61; Miln 304. aggin dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A I.136, 199; PvA 20. udar the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA 33; cp. Dial. II.208, note 2; kappuhn the universal conflagration J III.185; dv a wood or jungle fire J I.212; na the burning of a

reed J VI.100; padp fire of a lamp Miln 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire--god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jtaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagav the Lord Agni, e. g. at J I.285, 494; II.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J I.285; II.43. Aggi paricarati (cp. paricriy) to serve the sacred fire Vin I.31 (jail agg paricaritukm); A V.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihutta paric ThA 136); Dh 107; J I.494; DhA II.232. aggi juhati (cp. homa, hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A II.207; often combd. with aggihutta paricarati, e. g. S I.166; Sn p. 79. aggi namati & santappeti to worship the fire A V.235. aggissa (gen.) paricriko J YI.207 (cp. below paricrika); aggissa dhna A IV.41. -- 3. (ethical, always --) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rg, dos, moh, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S IV.19; A IV.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are huneyy, gahapat, dakkhieyy, kah. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D III.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In late books are found others: ind the fire of the senses PvA 56; dukkh the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaisr burning remorse PvA 60; sok burning grief ib. 41. Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini--sama jalita 668 (= samantato jali ta aggi Sn A 480); aggini--samsu 670 (= aggisamsu Sn A 481). The form aggin in phrase niccaggin can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with metri causa; otherwise as adj. aggini), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert. --agra (agyagra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin I.24; IV.109; D I.101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agra); M I.501; A V.234, 250. --khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire--brand S II.85; A IV. 128; Th 2, 351 (samkm); J IV.139; VI.330; Ps I.125; Dpvs VI.37; Miln 304. --gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. --ja fire--born J V.404 (C; text aggijta). --ha fire--place J V.155. --hna fire--place Vin II.120 (jantghare, in bathroom). --daddha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv I.74. --dha (mah) a holocaust A I.178. --niksin like fire J III.320 (suriya). --nibbna the extinction of fire J I.212. --pajjota fire--light A II.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda, suriya, a, pa). --paricaraa (--hna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA I.199. --paricariy fire--worship DhA II.232; Sn A 291 (pri) 456. --paricrika one who worship the fire a v.263 (brhmaa). --sl a heated hall or refectory Vin I.25, 49 = II.210; I.139; II.154. --sikh the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile pama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43, 90 (ayogua). --hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin I.33, 36 = J I.83; Vin I.246 = Sn 568 (mukha--yaa); S I.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J IV.211; VI.525; ThA 136 (= aggi); DhA IV.151 ( brhmao namati). --huttaka (nt.) fire--offering J VI.522 (= aggi--jhana C.). --hotta = hutta SnA 456 (v. l. BB hutta). --homa fire--oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D I.9 (= aggi--jhana DA I.93). Aggika (adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin I.71 (jailaka); D II.339 sq. (jaila); S I.166 (brhmaa). Aggha [see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA 77. -- mahaggha (adj.) of great value J IV.138; V.414; VI.209; Pv II.118. See also maharaha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. IV.139; V.414. -- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J V.484; cattari anagghni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisdanapallanka, dhraka, pdaphik DhA III.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J V.414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA IV.216. -- agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin II.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. -- 2. an oblation made to a guest D II.240; J IV.396 = 476. --kraka a valuator J I.124. --pada valuableness J V.473 (lakkhaa nma manta). Agghaka (adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of (--) Mhvs 30, 77. an priceless Mhvs 30, 72. Agghati (intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a)lfh/ reward, a)lfa/nw to deserve] to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve J I.112 (satasahassa; addhamsaka); VI.174, 367 (padaraja); DhA III.35 (main nagghma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kala nagghati (nagghanti) soasi not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kal) Vin II.156; S I.233; Dh 70; Vv 207 (= nanubhoti VvA 104), 437; J V.284. -- Caus. agghpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) J I.124; IV.137, 278; Miln 192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghpanaka & agghpaniya. Agghanaka (adj.) (--) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin IV.226; J I.61

(satasahass), 112; DA I.80 (kahpa); DhA III.120 (cuddasakoi); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. -- f. ik J I.178 (satasahass). Agghaniya (adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln 192. Agghpanaka [fr. agghpana to agghpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J I.124, 125; V.276 (ika). Agghpaniya (adj.) [grd. of agghpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in kamma the business of a valuator J IV.137. Agghika (nt.) (--) [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese g "festoon work") Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph) 34, 73 (ratan) 34, 76 (dhaj); Dvs I.39 (pupphamay); V.51 (kusum). Agghiya (adj. --n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valuable, precious, worth J VI.265 (mai); DhA II.41 (ratan of jewel's worth); Mhvs 30, 92. -- 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J V.324 = VI.516; Dpvs VI.65; VII.4. Agha1 Agha1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S I 22; M I.500 (roga gada salla agha); A II.128 (id.); J V.100; Th 2, 491; Sdhp 51. -- adj. painful, bringing pain J VI.507 (agha--m--miga = aghakara m. C.). --bhta a source of pain S III.189 (+ agha & salla). Agha2 Agha2 (m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M I.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a--kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaaniya is not strikeable DhsA 326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J IV.154 aghe hit = appaighe kse hit the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarik agh asavut andhakr D II.12; S V.454, and BSk. aghasavta M Vastu I.240, adj. dark M Vastu I.41; II.162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D II.12; S V.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. = vehsa gama VvA 78); J IV.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata); Vbh 84 (id.). --gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, 722; Vbh 84. --gmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S I.67 = Miln 242 (dicco seho aghagmina). Aghata at Th 1, 321 may be read as agha--gata or (preferably) with v. l. as aggha--gata, or (with Neumann) as aggha agghatna. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191. Aghammiga [to agha1?] a sort of wild animal J VI.247 (= aghvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475. Aghavin (adj.) [to agha1] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694 (= dukkhita SnA 489). Anka1 Anka1 = anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; karana branding J IV.366, 375. See also anketi. Anka2 Anka2 [Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr. a)gkw/n elbow, a)/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J V.322 = VI.218 (v. l. BB anga). -- (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the

hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses (ankena vahati) Vin II.114; D II.19 (anke pariharati to hold on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisdpeti seat on one's lap); M II.97 (ankena vahitv); Th 1, 299; J I.262 (anke nisinna); II.127, 236; VI.513; DhA I.170 (ankena vahitv) PvA 17 (nisdpeti). Ankita [pp. of anketi] marked, branded J I.231 (cakkankit Satthu pad); II.185 (kaaka with perforated ears). Ankura [cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J II.105; VI.331 (Buddh a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (vaa); Miln 50, 251 269; Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43. Ankusa [Vedic ankua; to anc, see anka2] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J I.9 (pacchi hook & basket); V.89 = VI.520 (pacchikhanitti), 529 (= phalna gahanattha ankusa). <-> (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin II.196 (+ kas); J VI.489; ThA 173 (ovda ankusa katv, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (dad). -- (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; -- acc beyond the reach of the goad D II.266 (nga). See also ankusaka. --gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.<-> driver's hook M II.94 (sippa). --gaha an eleph.--driver Dh 326. Ankusaka [see anka2, cp. ankusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J III.22. -- 2. an eleph.--driver's hook J III.431. --yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J II.68 (+ pacchi). Anketi [Denom. fr. anka1] to mark out, brand J I.451 lakkhaena); II.399. -- pp. ankita, q. v. Ankola [dial. for ankura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J VI.535. Cp. next. Ankolaka = ankola J IV.440; V.420. Anga (nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger--ring = Sk. angulya. See also anka, anguha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. sambhra); uttamanga the reproductive organ J V.197; also as "head" at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. paccanga), as sabbanga--kaly perfect in all limbs Pv III.35 (= sobhaa--sabbanga--paccang PvA 189) and in redupln. anga--m--angni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin III.119; Vv 382 (ehi naccamna); Pv II.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khdati). -- (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath the vows of the fast J I.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.). Esp. with numerals: cattri angni 4 constituents A II.79 (viz. sla, samdhi, pa. vimutti and rpa, vedan, sa, bhava), ahangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: ah angni ass ti) navanga Buddha--ssana see nava. -- (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D I.113 sq., 117 (imin p angena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA I.281 expls tena kra<-> ena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D I.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha--pddisu yena kenaci evarpena angena samanngato dghyu . . hot ti . . angasatthan = chiromantics DA I.92). Thus in combn. with samanngata & sampanna always meaning endowed with "good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J I.3 (sabbanga--sampanna nagara a city possessing all marks of perfection); II.207. <-> In enumn. with var. numerals: thi angehi s. A I.115; cattri sotapannassa a-- D III.227 = A IV.405 sq.; pacanga--vippahno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nvaraa) and pacanga--samanngato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sla--kkhandha, see kkhandha II.A d) S I.99 = A I.161; V.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujta of pure birth, ajjhyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirpa handsome, slava of good conduct, padita clever) D I.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D I.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S III.83; Kh IV.10 = KhA 88; cp. M I.446 (dasah angehi samanngato rao assjniyo). -- (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattika anga my own part or interest (opp. bhira the interest in the outside world). A I.16 sq. = S V.101 sq.; It 9. rao anga an asset or profit for the king M I.446. Thus adv. tadanga (see also ta I.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this, therefore M I.492; A IV.411; Sdhp 455, 456; imin p angena for that reason M II.168. -- In compn. with verbs angi (ang): angigata having limbs

or ports, divided DA I.313; cp. samangi (--bhta). --jta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin I.191 (of cows); III.20, 37, 205; J II.359; Miln 124. --paccanga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M I.81; J VI--20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv II.1212 (= paripua--sabbanga--paccangavat PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA I.390; ThA 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M I.395; sabbanga--paccangni all limbs Miln 148. -- (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddavachidda, sehanu--sehi, khadkhada, cuavicua) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangni above 1), piecemeal M I.133 (e daseyya), 366; J I.20; IV.324 (chinditv). --paccangat the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA 134 (suvisuddh). --paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D I.34 (sabbanga--peccang); PvA 189. --rga painting or rouging the body Vin II.107 (+ mukha). --lahi sprout, offshoot ThA 226. --vta gout Vin I.205. --vijj the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D I.9 (see expl. at DA I.93); J I.290 (ya cheka clever in fortune--telling); anubhva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J II.200; V.284; phaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J II.21, 250; V.458. --vekalla bodily deformity DhA II.26. --sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA I.92. --sambhra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S I.135; Miln 41. --hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J VI.538. Angaa1 Angaa1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. angaa & na; to anga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin II.218; J I.109 (= manussnan sacaraa--hne anvae bhmibhge C.); II.243, 290, 357; Dvs I.27. -- cetiy an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA I.191, 197; VvA 254. rj the empty space before the king's palace, the royal square J I.124, 152; II.2; DhA II.45. --hna a clearing (in a wood or park) J I.249, 421. --pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J II.200. Angaa2 Angaa2 [prob. to anj, thus a variant of ajana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A V.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sangana Sn 279); D I.76; M I.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A II.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata<-> raja = anganan abhv malna ca vigam . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa DhA III.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60; Nett 87. Angada [cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J V.9, 410 (citt, adj. with manifold bracelets). Angadin (adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J V.9. Angra (m. nt.) [Vedic angra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A III.97, 380, 407; J I.73; III.54, 55; V.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32. kul the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S IV.324 (see under kula). --kaha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA I.261. --kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA I.260; Dhs A 333; VvA 142. --kammakara a charcoal burner J VI.209. --ksu a charcoal pit M I.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J I.233; Sn 396; ThA 288; DhA I.442; Sdhp 208. --pacchi a basket for ashes DhA IV.191. --pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A I.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (ropaa); Sdhp 208. --masa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. --masi ashes DhA III.309. --rsi a heap of burning coal J III.55. Angraka (adj.) [cp. Sk. angraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA I.95; cp. J I.73. Angrika a charcoal--burner J VI.206 (= angra--kammakara p. 209). Angrin (adj.) [to angra] (burning) like coal, of brightred colour, crimson Th 1, 527 = J I.87 (dum trees in full bloom).

Angika (--) (adj.) [fr. anga] consisting of parts, -- fold; only in compn. with num. like ah, duv (see dve), catur, pac etc., q. v. Angin (adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, -- fold, see catur & pacc (under anga--paccangin). -- f. angin having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 (= ThA 226). Anguha [cp. Sk. anguha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb Vin III.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. -- 2. the great toe J II.92; Mhvs 35, 43. --pada thumb--mark A IV.127 = S III.154. --sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv III.52, cp. PvA 198. Anguhaka = anguha J IV.378; V.281; pd the great toe S V.270. Angula [Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M I.395 (vank angula karoti to bend the fingers, v. l. anguli); A III.6 (id.); J V 70 (go adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. anguha and angul). -2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger--breadth, an inch Vin II.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (ah); DhA III.127 (ek). --ahi (? cp. anga--lahi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA I.93. --anguli fingers and toes DhA III.214. --antarik the interstices between the fingers Vin III.39; Miln 180; DhA III.214. Angulika (nt.) [= angul] a finger J III.13 (pac); V.204 (va = pav ankurasadis vaangul p. 207). See also pacangulika. Angul & Anguli (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic angul & i; see anga] a finger A IV.127; Sn 610; J III.416; IV.474; V.215 (va with rounded fingers); Miln 395; DhA II.59; IV.210; SnA 229. --patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin III.84 = IV.110; D I.91 = A IV.343. --pada finger--mark A IV.127 = S III.154. --poha snapping or cracking the fingers J V.67. --muddik a signet ring Vin II.106; J IV.498; V.439, 467. --sanghaana = poha DA I.256. Anguleyyaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. angulyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerln = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a finger--ring J II.444 (= nikkha). Acankama (avj.) [a + cankama] not fit for walking, not level or even Th 1, 1174 (magga). Acittaka (adj.) [a + citta2 + ka] 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional DhA II.42. -- 2. without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly J IV.58 (C. for acetas). Acittikata (adj.) [a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikra] not well thought of Miln 229. Acira see cira & cp. nacira. Acela (adj. --n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti--Buddhist naked ascetic D I.161, 165; III.6, 12, 17 sq.; S I.78; J V.75. Acelaka = acela D I.166; III.40; A I.295; II.206; III.384 (svaka); J III.246; VI.229; Pug 55; DhA III.489. Acc-- 1. a + c, e. g. accuta = a + cuta. -- 2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e. g. acci = arci. Accag [ati + ag] 3rd sg. pret. of ati--gacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Sn 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atta at DhA IV.494); Dh 414.

Accankusa (adj.) [ati + ankusa] beyond the reach of the goad D II.266 (nga). Accatari see atitarati. Accati [Vedic arcati, c, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i. e. to sound clear, cp. arci] to praise, honour, celebrate Dvs V.66 (accayittha, pret.) -- pp accita, q. v. Accanta (adj. -- & adv. --) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J I.223; Miln 413; VvA 71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. <-> 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S I.130 ( hataputt mhi); III.13 = A I.291 sq.; V.326 sq. (niha, yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (niymat final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). -- 3. (--) exceedingly, extremely, very much A I.145 (sukhumla, extremely delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (suddhi = param ttha--accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (ruci); Dh 162 (dusslya = ekanta DhA III.153). Accaya [from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya] (1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away, end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin I.25; D II.127 (rattiy a.), 154 (mam when I shall be dead); M I.438 (tems after 3 months); S I.69; Snp. 102 (catunna msna), p. 110 (rattiy); J I.253 (ekha--dvh), 291 (katiph after a few days); PvA 47 (katiph), 82 (dasams), 145 (vassasatna). -- (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur--accaya difficult to overcome, of kmapanka Sn 945 (= dur--atikkamanya SnA 568), of sanga Sn 948: tah Dh 336; sota It 95. -- (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm), transgression, offence Vin I.133 (thull a grave offence), 167 (id.); II.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo ma accagam a fault has overcome me, i. e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) D I.85 (= abhibhavitv pavatto has overwhelmed me DA I.236); A I.54; M I.438 (id.); accaya accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin I.315; A I.103; II.146 sq.; deseti to confess the transgression S I.239; accayato paigahti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i. e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at D I.85 = (Vin II.192; M I.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya--paiggahaa pardon, absolution J V.380; accayena desana paigahti J I.379; accaya khamati to forgive Miln 420. Accasara (adj.) [a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + s), influenced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (sm). Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (sm), thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self--sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S I.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); J IV.6 (+ atisara); DhA IV.230 (= expecting too much). -- 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of paha a question) M I.304; S V.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasrin. Accasar (f.) [abstr. to accasara] overbearing, pride, selfsurity Vbh 358 (+ my). Note. In id. p. at Pug 23 we read acchdan instead of accasar. Accasari [fr. ati + s] aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray J V.70. Accasrin (adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Sn 8 sq. (yo naccasr, opp. to na paccasr; expld. at SnA 21 by yo natidhvi, opp. na ohiyyi). Accahasi [fr. ati + h] aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take J III.484 (= ativiya hari C.). Accabhikkhaa (--) [ati + abhikkhaa] too often J V.233 (sasagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiha). Accraddha (adj. adv.) [ati + raddha] exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin I.182; Th 1, 638; SnA 21. Accyata (adj.) [ati + yata] too long A III.375.

Accyika (adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J VI.549, 553. -- 2. urgent, pressing M I.149 (karaiyan business) II.112; J I.338; V.17 (nt.) hurry DhA I.18. See also acceka. Accvadati [ati + vadati; or is it = ajjhvadati = adhi + vadati?] to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin IV.224, 263; S II.204 sq.; J V.433 (v. l. BB ajjhrati), 434 (v. l. BB aghcarati for ajjhcarati = ajjhvadati?). Accsanna (adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a. n'atidra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance). Accahita (adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J IV.46 = V.146 (= ati ahita C.) = VI.306 (id.). Acci & (in verse) acc (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to c, cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S IV.290 (spelt acchi), 399; A IV.103; V.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jlasikh Nd2 11); J V.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dp); Sdhp 250. Accik (f.) [fr. acci] a flame M I.74; S II.99. Accita [pp. of accati] honoured, praised, esteemed J VI.180. Accimant (adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arcimant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J V.266; VI.248; Vv 388. Acci--bandha (adj.) [= accibaddha?] at Vin I.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa--kedra--baddha ("divided into short pieces" Vin Texts II.207), i. e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv. ll. are acca and acchi, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi--baddha "in the shape of cubes or dice", i. e. with square fields. Accuggacchati [ati + uggacchati] to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma D II.38; A V.152 (in simile of lotus). Accuggata (adj.) [ati + uggata] 1. very high or lofty Miln 346 (giri); VvA 197; DhA II.65. -- 2. too high, i. e. too shrill or loud J VI.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.). Accuha (adj.) [ati + uha] very hot, too hot Sn 966; Nd1 487; DhA II.85, 87 (v. l. for abbhuha). See also ati--uha. Accuta (adj.) [a + cuta] immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. Ep. of Nibbna (see also cuta) A IV.295, 327; Sn 204, 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd2 12); Dh 225 (= sassata DhA III.321); Sdhp 47. Accupahapeti at J V.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccupahapeti (does not indulge in or care for). Accupati at J IV.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantv uppati. There is no need for Kern's corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.). Accussanna (adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin II.151. Acceka = accyika, special; cvara a spccial robe Vin III.261; cp. Vin Texts I.293. Acceti [ati + eti fr. i] 1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Th 1, 145 (accayanti ahoratt). -- 2. to overcome, to get over Miln 36 (dukkha). -- Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on J VI.17 (slasmi; C. vueti), but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q. v.).

Accogha (adj.) [ati + ogha] too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into A IV.282, 287, 323 sq. Accodaka (nt.) [ati + udaka] too much water (opp. anodaka no water) DhA I.52. Accodara (nt.) [ati + udara] too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly J IV.279 (C. ati--udara). Accha1 Accha1 (adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to c (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ka bald, bare and Vedic kvan bright. Monier--Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin I.206 (kajika); D I.76 (mai = tanucchavi DA I.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka--rahada); M I.100; S II.281 (patta); III.105 (id.); A I.9; J II.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vri); DA I.113 (ygu). --odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. odik Vv 412 = 602. Accha2 Accha2 [Vedic ka = Gr. a)/rktos, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth] a bear Vin I.200; A III.101; J V.197, 406, 416; Miln 23, 149. At J VI.507 accha figures as N. of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acch nma aghammig C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q. v.). Accha3 Accha3 = akkha2 (a die) see acci--bandha. Accha4 Accha4 (adj.) [Ved. ka] hurtful, painful, bad DhA IV.163 (ruja). Acchaka = accha2, a bear J V.71. Acchati [Vedic syati & ste, s; cp. Gr. h_(stai] 1. to sit, to sit still Vin I.289; A II.15; It 120 (in set carati tihati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 (= nisdati VvA 298); PvA 4. -- 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone Th 1, 936; J IV.306. -- 3. to be, behave, live Vin II.195; D I.102; S I.212; Vv 112; Pv III.31 (= nisdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88; DhA I.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggi karitv a. (= aggi karoti) D I.102; aggi paricaranto a. (= aggi paricarati) DA I.270; tanta pasrento a. (= tanta pasreti) DhA I.424. -- Pot. acche It 110; aor. acchi Vin IV.308; DhA I.424. Acchanna (adj.) [pp. of acchdeti] covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) J JII.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.). At D I.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) = not fair, not suitable or proper (pairpa). Acchambhin (adj.) [a + chambhin] not frightened, undismayed, fearless Sn 42 (reading achambhin; Nd2 13 expls. abhru anutrsi etc.); J VI.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin. Acchar1 Acchar1 (f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with cchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaa in akkhaa--vedhin (cp. BSk. accha Divy 555), or possibly a relation to + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger--tips: 1. (lit.) acchara paharati to snap the fingers J II.447; III.191; IV.124, 126; V.314; VI.366; DhA I.38, 424. -- As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger--tips, a pinch J V.385; DhA II.273

(gahaamatta); cp. ekacchara--matta DhA II.274. -- 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment, in ekacchara--kkhae in one moment Miln 102, and in def. of acchariya (q. v.) at DA I.43; VvA 329. --sanghta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, matta momentary, only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchasanghta Divy 142) A I.10, 34, 38; IV.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaikmattam pi khaa angulipohanamattam pi kla). --sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger J III.127. Acchar2 Acchar2 (f.) [Vedic apsaras = pa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph] a celestial nymph M I.253 (pl. accharyo) II.64; Th 2, 374 (= devacchar ThA 252); J V.152 sq. (Alambus a.) Vv 55 (= devaka VvA 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; DhA III.8, 19; PvA 46 (dev); Miln 169; Sdhp 298. Accharika (nt. or f.?) [fr. acchar2] in vdeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an acchar or heavenly nymph) A IV.265. Acchariya (adj.--nt.) [cp. Sk. carya since Upanishads of uncertain etym. -- The conventional etym. of Pli grammarians connects it with acchar1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. carya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapla: anabhiha--ppavattitya accharpaharaa--yogga that which happens without a moment's notice, at the snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda--leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: acchar--yoggan ti acchariya acchara paharitu yuttan ti attho DA I.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D II.155; M I.79; III.118, 125, 144 (an); S IV.371; A I.181; Miln 28, 253; DhA III.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an). As nt. often in exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J I.223, 279; IV.138; VI.94 (a. vata bho); DhA IV.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhuta = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D I.2, 60, 206, 210; II.8; and in phrase acchariy abbhut dhamm strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, M III.118, 125; A IV.198; Miln 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta--(citta--)jt with their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA IV.52; PvA 6, 50. -- See also acchera & accheraka. Acchdana (nt.) [fr. acchdeti] covering, clothing Th 1, 698; Miln 279. -- fig. protection, sheltering J I.307. Acchdan (f.) [= prec.] covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19, 23. -- Note. In id. p. at Vbh 358 we read accasar for acchdan. Is the latter merely a gloss? Acchdeti [ + chdeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. cchdayati jvitena to keep alive Av. , I.300; Divy 136, 137] to cover, to clothe, to put on D I.63 = It 75; J I.254; III.189; IV.318; Pug 57; Pv I.105 (ger. acchdayitvna); DA I.181 (= paridahitv); PvA 49, 50. -- fig. to envelop, to fill J VI.581 (abbha rajo acchdesi dust filled the air). -- pp. acchanna (q. v.). Acchi at S IV.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q. v.). Acchijja (v. l. accheja) destroying (?) S I.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi. Acchidda see chidda. Acchindati [ + chindati, lit. to break for oneself] to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin IV.247 (saya a. to appropriate); J II.422; III.179; IV.343; Miln 20; Sdhp 122. -- ger. acchinditv J II.422; DhA I.349; PvA 241 (saya); & acchetv M I.434. Caus. II. acchindpeti to induce a person to theft Vin IV.224, 247. Acchinna (adj.) [ + chinna, pp. of acchindati] removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin IV.278, 303; J II.78; IV.45; V.212. Acchiva [*Sk. akiba and akba] a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) J VI.535.

Acchupeti [ + chupeti, Caus. of chupati] to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin I.290 (aggaa) II.112. Acchecchi [Sk. acchaitst] 3rd sg. aor. of chindati "he has cut out or broken, has destroyed" (see also chindati 3), in combn. with taha M I.122; S I.12, 23, 127 (so read for acchejja); IV.105, 207. It 47; A III.246, 445; DhA IV.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dh 351). The v. l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form & tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati--ejin (ej), acchecchi = ati--icchin (icch). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor. Acchejja = a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati. Acchedana (nt.) [abstr. to acchindati] robbing, plundering J VI.544. Acchera (adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous S I.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv III.51 (rpa = acchariyasabhva PvA 197); Sdhp 244, 398. Accheraka (adj.) = acchera (acchariya) J I.279; Bu I.9 (pihra). Aja [Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a hegoat, a ram D I.6, 127; A II.207; J I.241; III.278 sq.; V.241; Pug 56; PvA 80. --eaka [Sk. ajaidaka] goats & sheep D I.5, 141; A II.42 sq., 209; J I.166; VI.110; Pug 58. As pl. S I.76; It 36; J IV.363. --pada goat--footed M I.134. --pla goatherd, in nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds'Nigrodha--tree" Vin I.2 sq. Dpvs I.29 (cp. M Vastu III.302). --plik a woman goatherd Vin III.38. --lakkhaa "goat--sign", i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D I.9 (expld. DA I.94 as "evarpna ajna mansa khditabba evarpna na khditabban ti"). --ladik (pl.) goats'dung, in phrase nimatt a. a cup full of goats'dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J I.419; DhA II.70; PvA 282. --vata "goats'habit", a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J IV.318. aja--pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so also at Vism 161. Ajaka a goat, pl. goats Vin II.154. -- f. ajik J III.278 & ajiy J V.241. Ajagara [aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus "goateater"] a large snake (rock--snake?), Boa Constrictor J VI.507; Miln 23, 303, 364, 406; DhA III.60. Also as ajakara at J III.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64). Ajacca (adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J III.19; VI.100. Ajajjara see jajjara. Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumra see jaddhu. Ajamoja [Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajj] cummin--seed VvA 186. Aj (f.) a she--goat J III.125; IV.251. Ajnana (--) (nt.) [a + jnana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J V.199 (bhva); VI.177 (kla). Ajina (nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats'skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D I.167; Sn 1027; J I.12, 53; IV.387; V.407. kharjina a rough skin (as garment) M I.343; S IV.118; A II.207; Sn 249 (= kharni a--cammni SnA 291). dantjina? ivory (q. v.). --khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D I.167; S I.117; A I.240, 295; II.206; Vin I.306; III.34;

J VI.569. --pavei a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin I.192; D I.7 (= ajina--cammehi macappamena sibbitv kat pavei DA I.87); A I.181. --s a garment of skins (= ajina--camma--s DhA IV.156) Dh 394 = J I.481 = III.85. Ajini aor 3rd sg. jayati, q. v. (see ajaka). Ajira (nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)gro/s, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3. Ajraka (nt.) [a + jraka] indigestion J I.404; II.181, 291; III.213, 225. Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] <-> (a) not to be taken by force Kh VIII.8 (cp. KhA 223). <-> (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn 288; J V.509. Ajeyya2 Ajeyya2 (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J VI.323. Ajja & Ajj (adv.) [Vedic adya & ady, a + dy, a being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dy an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus "on this day"] to--day, now Sn 75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh 326; J I.279; III.425 (read bahuta ajj; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv I.117 (= idni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. <-> Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja--tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin I.18; D I.85; DA I.235. --kla (adv.) this morning J VI.180; --divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23. Ajjatana (adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, today's, present, modern (opp. pora) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J II.409. -- dat. ajjatanya for today Vin I.17; PvA 171 & passim. Ajjat (f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjata ca this very day S I.83 (v. l. ajjeva). Ajjati [Vedic arjati, j, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J III.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.). Ajjava (adj.--n.) [cp. Sk. rjava, to ju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D III.213; A I.94; II.113; III.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J III.274; Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an); SnA 292 (= ujubhva), 317 (id.). Ajjavat (f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhat & avankat). Ajjita [pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp 98. Ajjuka [*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin IV.35; DA I.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka). Ajjukaa [*Sk. arjakara] N. of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J VI.535 (nn). Ajjuho (adv.) [haplology fr. ajja--juho; see juh] this moonlight night Vin I.25; IV.80. Ajjuna [Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgo/s white, a)/rguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J VI.535; DhA I.105 (rukkha).

Ajjh-- Assimilation group of adhi + vowel. Ajjhag [adhi + ag 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced S I.12 (vimna); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi pailabhi), 956 (rati; expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jtimaraa); Dh 154 (tahna khaya); Vv 327 (visesa attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amata santi; expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigachi, T. adhigacchati). Ajjhatta (adj. --n.) [cp. Sk. adhytma, cp. att], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddh bhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. <-> D I.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhna), 70 = A II.210; V.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkha = niyakajjhatta attano santne ti attho DA I.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S I.70, 169; II..27 (katha kath hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukha dukkha); III.180 (id.); IV.1 sg. (yatanni), 139, 196; V.74 (hita citta ajjhatta susahita suvimutta a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A I.40 (rpasa), 272 (kmacchanda etc.); II.158. (sukhadukkha), 211; III.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vpasantacitta); IV.32 (sankhitta), 57 (itthindriya), 299 (citta), 305 (rpasa), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vpasantacitta); V 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J I.045 (chtajjhatta with hungry insides); V.338 (id.); Ps I.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jta DhsA 169), 204, 1044; Pug 59; Vbh 1 sq. (khandh), 228 (sati), 327 (pa), 342 (arpasa). -- adv. inwardly, personally (in contrast--pair ajjhatta v bahiddh v; see also cpd. bahiddh) A I.284; II.171; IV.305; V.61; Sn 917 (= upajjhayassa v cariyassa v te gu ass ti Nd1 350). --rammaa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047. --cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn 174, 388. --bahiddh inside & outside, personal--external, mutual, interacting S II.252 sq.; III.47; IV.382; Nd2 15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddh). --rata with inward joy D II.107 = S V.263 = Dh 362 = Ud 64 (+ samhita); Th 1, 981; A IV.312; DhA IV.90 (= gocar ajjhatta--sankhtya kammahna--bhvanya rata). --rpa one's own or inner form Vin III.113 (opp. bahiddh--rpa & ajjh--bah r.). --saojana an inner fetter, inward bond A I.63 sq.; Pug 22; Vbh 361. --santi inner peace Sn 837 (= ajjhattna rgdna santibhva SnA 545; cp. Nd1 185). --samuhna originating from within J I.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddh). Ajjhattika (adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattika vuccati citta); opp. bhira outward (q. v.). See also yatana. -- M I.62; S I.73 ( rakkh na bhir); IV.7 sq. (yatanni); V.101 (anga); A I.16 (anga); II.164 (dhtuyo); III.400 (yatanni); V.52 (id.); It 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kh IV. (= KhA 82); J IV.402 (bhira--vatthu aycitv ajjhattikassa nma gahati); Dhs 673, 751; Vbh 13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq. Ajjhapara S V.218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.). [adhi + + *prpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J II.450; VI.566 (p; C. attano santika patta). -- 2. having fallen upon, attacked J II.59; V.198 (p; C. sampatta) -- 3. attained, found, got Sn 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); J III.296 (p. C. sampatta); V.158 (ajjhpatta; C. sampatta). Ajjhabhavi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, overpower, overcome S I.240 (prohib. m vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J II.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati. Ajjhabhsi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhseti to address S IV.117 (gthhi); Kh V. = Sn p. 46 (gthya); PvA 56, 90. Ajjhabhu (3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It 76 (dujjaya a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi. Ajjhayana (nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln 225. See also ajjhena. Ajjhavodahi 3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhti] to put down J V.365 (= odahi, hapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavdahi (= Sk. avdht).

Ajjhgre (adv.) [adhi + agre, loc. of agra] at home, in one's own house A I.132 = It 109; A II.70. Ajjhcarati [adhi (or ati?) + + car] 1. to conduct oneself according to Vin II.301; M I.523; Miln 266. -- 2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) J IV.231 (aam--aa). pp. ajjhcia. See also accvadati & aticarati. Ajjhcra [to adhi (ati?) + + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Prjika's or Saghdisesa's) Vin I.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, I.184. -- 2. flirtation Vin III.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhsati). -- 3. sexual intercourse J I.396; V.327 (cara v. l. for ajjhvara); Miln 127 (an). Ajjhcia [pp. of ajjhcarati] habitually done Vin II.80 sq., 301. Ajjhjva [adhi (ati?) + + jv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M II.245 (+ adhipimokkha). Ajjhpajjati [adhi + + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin IV.237. pp. ajjhpanna (q. v.). Ajjhpatti (f.) [abstr. to ajjhpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an). Ajjhpana1 Ajjhpana1 (nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln 225. Ajjhpana2 Ajjhpana2 (nt.) [ + jhpana fr. k] burning, conflagration J VI.311. Ajjhpanna [pp. of adhi + pajjati] become guilty of offence D I.245; III.43; S II.270; A IV.277, 280; V.178, 181. an guiltless, innocent Vin I.103; D III.46; S II.194, 269; A V.181; Miln 401. For all passages except A IV.277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna. Ajjhpita [adhi + + pita] harassed, overpowered, tormented PvA 180 (khuppipsya by hunger & thirst). Ajjhbhava [cp. Sk. adhybhava] excessive power, predominance J II.357. Ajjhbhavati [adhi + + bh, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J II.357. Ajjhyaka [cp. Sk. adhyyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhyaka J VI.209; SnA 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D I.88, 120; III.94; A I.163; III.223; Sn 140 (kula: thus for ajjhyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J I.3; VI.201, 498; DA I.247. Ajjhruha (& rha) (adj.) [to adhi + + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A III.63 sq. = S V.96; J III.399. Ajjhrha (adj.) [pp. of adhi + + ruh] grown up or high over J III.399. Ajjhrhati [adhi + rohati cp. atyrohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S I.221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings I.285). Ajjhvadati see accvadati. Ajjhvara [fr. adhi + + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J V.322, 324, 326, 327 (expld at all passages by

paris). Should we read ajjhcara? Cp. ajjhcra. Ajjhvasatar [n. ag. to ajjhvasati] one who inhabits D I.63 (agra). Ajjhvasati [adhi + + vas] to inhabit (agra a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D II.16; M I.353; Vin IV.224; J I.50; Pug 57; Miln 348. -- pp. ajjhvuttha (q. v.). Ajjhvuttha [cp. Sk. adhyuita; pp. of ajjhvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin II.210; J I.145; II.333; PvA 24 (ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 (= anosita). Ajjhsaya [fr. adhi + + ri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D II.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J I.88, 90; II.352; V.382; DhsA 314, 334; PvA 88, 116, 133 (adj. dn intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp 219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhsayanurpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA 61, 106, 128. Ajjhsayat (f.) [abstr. to ajjhsaya] desire, longing PvA 127 (ur great desire for c. loc.). Ajjhsita [pp. of adhi + + ri] intent on, bent on Miln 361 (jhn). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita. Ajjhiha [pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin I.113 (an unbidden); D II.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn p. 218 (= ajjhesita Nd2 16); J VI.292 (= atta C.); DhA IV.100 (v. l. abhijjhiha). See also an. Ajjhupagacchati [adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th 2, 474 (= sampaicchati ThA 285); J II.403; Miln 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.). Ajjhupagata [pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A V.87, cp. 210; V.187 sq. Ajjhupagamana (nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agreement, justification Vin II.97, 104. Ajjhupaharati [adhi + upa + h; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J II.293 (aor. ajjhuphari = ajjhohari C.). Ajjhupekkhati [adhi + upa + ik; cp. BSk. adhyupekati] 1. to look on A I.257; Miln 275. -- 2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A IV.45 (kahaggi, has to be looked after); PvA 149 (sisa cola v). -- 3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin II.78 = III.162, cp. J I.147; M I.155; II.223; A III.194, 435; J V.229; DhA IV.125. Ajjhupekkhana (nt.) & (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps I.16; II.119; Vbh 230 sq.; DhA IV.3. Ajjhupekkhitar [n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S V.69 (sdhuka), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh 227. Ajjhupeti [cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J IV.440. Ajjheti [Sk. dhyyati, Denom. fr. adhyya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn 948 (socati +); expld at Nd1 433 by nijjhyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati). Ajjhena (nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M III.1; J II.327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesan); III.114 (= japa); V.10 (pl. = vede); VI.201 = 207; Vbh 353; SnA 314 (mant). --kujja (kta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn 242; cp. SnA 286.

Ajjhesati (adhi + i; cp. BSk. adhyeate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA IV.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin II.200; pp. ajjhiha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiha & esita. Ajjhesan (f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin I.6 = D II.38 = S I.138; J II.327 (better v. l. ajjhena). Ajjhesita [pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiha] requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 (= ajjhiha). Ajjhoksa [adhi + oksa] the open air, only in loc. ajjhokse in the open Vin I.15; S I.212; DhA IV.100. Ajjhogha [pp. of ajjhoghati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M I.457; S I.201; Miln 348. [Sk. *abhyavaghate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D I.101 (vana), 222 (samudda); M I.359, 536; A III.75, 368; IV.356; V.133; Vin III.18; J I.7; Nd1 152 (oghati +); Miln 87 (samudda); 300 (vana). -- pp. ajjhogha (q. v.). Cp. pariyoghati. Ajjhohapeti [adhi + ava + hapeti, Caus. of sth] to bring to PvA 148 (gma), where we should read hapeti. Ajjhotthata [pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J I.363 (ajjhottaa), 410; V.91 (= adhipanna); DhA I.278; PvA 55; Dvs V.5. Ajjhottharati [adhi + ava + st] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin I.111; J I.61, 72, 73; Miln 296, 336; Dh I.264; Pass. tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A III.92 = Pug 67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA 48 (gmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.). Ajjhopanna (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old--standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M I.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi--opanna). The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS sub<-> stitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. XIX.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhpanna, from which it took the and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. -- 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M I.162, 173, 369; A I.74; II.28; III.68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA I.59; as v. l.: D I.245. <-> 2. ajjhosna as v. l.: A I.74 (C. expls. ajjhosya gilitv hita); Nd2 under nissita & passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA I.59 (id.). -- 3. ajjhpanna as T. reading: D I.245; III.43, 46; S. II.194, 270: IV.332 (ajjhapaa); A V.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v. l.: M I.162; A III.242; Ud 75, 76. Ajjhobhavati [adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi] to overcome, overpower, destroy J II.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.). Ajjhomaddati [adhi + ava + md] to crush down A IV.191, 193. Ajjhomucchita [pp. adhi + ava + mrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A III.57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomucta or muccita better: sarre attached to her body, clinging to her b.). Ajjholambati [adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to S III 137; M III.164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp 284 & 296.

Ajjhosa = ajjhosya, in verse only as ajjhosa tihati to cleave or cling to S IV.73; Th 1, 98, 794. Ajjhosati [adhi + ava + sayati, s, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M I.328 (c. acc. pahavi, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M I.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. etabba); DhsA 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.). Ajjhosna (nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D II.58 sq.; III.289; M I.498 (+ abhinandana); S III.187; A I.66; II.11 (dihi, kma + tah). In combn. with (icch) and mucch at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and tah (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lbha, (the expln. at DhsA 363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of tah). Ajjhosya [ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasya tihati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tihati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M I.266; S. IV.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln 69. See also ajjhosa. Ajjhosita [cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + s; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. rita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) S II.94 (+ mamyita); A II.25 (diha suta muta +); Nd1 75, 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita; Th 2, 470 (asre = tahvasena abhiniviha ThA 284); Pv IV.84 (mayha ghare = tahbhinivisena abhiniviha PvA 267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhsita). --an S IV.213; V.319; Nd1 411; Miln 74 (pabbajita). Ajjhohata [pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisa maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook). Ajjhoharaa (nt.) = ajjhohra 1. A V.324; J VI.213. Ajjhoharaiya (adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J VI.258; DhA I.284. Ajjhoharati [Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + h] to swallow, eat, take as food M I.245; J I.460; II.293; VI.205, 213; Miln 366; PvA 283 (aor.) --pp. ajjhohaa (q.v.). Ajjhohra [Sk. abhyavahra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin IV.233; Miln 176, 366. -- 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower"; cp. timingala) J V.462. Acati J I.417, read achati (see next). Achati [in meaning = kaddhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (krayati) to the Jain Prk. achvei = aQhati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D II.291 (bhamakro dgha a., where K has note: ajanto ti pi acchanto ti pi ptho) = M I.56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch & aj); Th 1, 750 (acmi T., v.l. ami). Achati should also be read at J I 417 for udaka acanti (in expln. of udacan pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udaka kkaddhati in the same sentence. Aja (adv.) [orig. imper. of ajati1; cp. Sk. anjas (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J I.192. Ajati1 Ajati1 [= Sk. jati, jyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)re/gw; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, achati, ajjita, naja--nejja]. See aja, ajaya, ajali, ajasa. Ajati2 & Ajeti Ajati2 & Ajeti [= Sk. ajayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. aji ointment, jya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint,

unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S II.281; J IV.219 (akkhni ajetv, v. l. BB acitv). Caus. II. ajpeti DhA I.21. <-> pp. ajita (q. v.). Ajana (nt.) [from ajati2] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black (cp. kaha II. and kla1 note). -- 1. Vin I.203 (five kinds viz. k, ras, sot, geruka, kapalla); D I.7, 12; DA I.98 (khr); 284; DhA III.354 (akkhi eye--salve). -- 2. glossy, jet--black J I.194; II.369; V.416. The reading ajana at A IV.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamatta. See also pacc. In meaning collyrium box at Th 2, 413 (= ajana--ni ThA 267); DhA II.25. --akkhiha with anointed eyes Th 1, 960. --upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin I.203; II.112. --cua aromatic powder DhsA 13. --ni an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA 267. --rukkha N. of a tree ("black" tree) J I.331. --vaa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D II.18 (lomni); J I.138 (kes), 194; II.369; PvA 258 (vana). Ajan (f.) [fr. ajana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin I.203, 204; II.135; IV.168; M II.65 = Th 1, 773. Ajanisalk (f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin I.203; II.135; J III.419. Ajaya (adj.) [from ajati1] straight J III.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and jjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for ajasa? Ajali [cp. Sk. ajali, fr. ajati1] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to "tender" one's respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA 7: dasanakha--samodhna--samujjala ajali paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) ajali pameti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin II.188; D I.118; Sn 352; Sn p. 79. (b.) paggahti to perform the a. salutation J I.54; DhA IV.212; VvA 7, 312 (sirasmi on one's head); PvA 93. (c.) karoti id. PvA 178; cp. katajali (adj.) with raised hands Sn 1023; J I.17; PvA 50, and ajalikata id. Pv II.1220. Cp. pajali --kamma respectful salutation, as above A I.123; II.180; IV.130; Vv 788, 8316; DhA I.32. --karaya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D III.5; A II.34; III.36; IV.13 sq.; It 88. Ajalik (f.) [= ajali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha--samodhna samujjala ajali sirasi paggahant gua--visihna apacayna aksi). Ajasa [Sk. jasa (?). Cp. rjava = P. ajjava, see ajati1 & ajaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D I.235; J I.5; Th 2, 99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pajasa. Ajita [Sk. ankta & ajayita, pp. of ajeti] smeared, anointed J I.77 (su--ajitni akkhni); IV.421 (ajitakkha). Aa (pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)/llos (a)/ljos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3] another etc. -- A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin III.144 (aena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn 459, 789, 904; Dh 158 (opp. attna), 165; J I.151 (opp. attano); II.333 (aa vykaroti give a diff. answer). -- 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn 1052 (= uttari nt. Nd2 17); else J I.294. aa kici (indef.) anything else J I.151. yo ao every other, whoever else J I.256. -- 3. ae (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn 189, 663, 911; Dh 43, 252, 355; J I.254. -- B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. aa . . aa the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin I.15; Miln 40; etc. <-> 2. reciprocative ao aa, aamaa, aoa one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llh/lwn, allh/lous in pl.). (a.) ao aa Dh 165. (b.) aamaa (cp. BSk. ayamaya M Vastu II.436), as pron.: n'la aamaassa sukhya v dukkhya v D I.56 = S III 211. n'aamaassa dukkha iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn 148. dadehi aamaa upakkamanti (approach each other) M I.86 = Nd2 199. agravo viharati A III.247. dve jan ghtayisu (slew each other) J I.254. aamaa hasanti J V.111; musale hantv J V.267. dadabhigena PvA 58; or adj.: aamaa vera bandhisu (established mutual enmity) J II.353; piyasavsa vasisu J II.153; aamaa accaya

desetv (their mutual mistake) DhA I.57; or adv. dve pi aamaa paibaddha citta ahesu (in love with each other) J III.188; or --: aamaa--paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps II.49, 58. <-> (c.) aoa (--) J V.251 (nissita); Dvs V.45 (bhinna). -- 3. disjunctive aa . . aa one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aa jva . . aa sarra one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D I.157; M I.430; A V.193; a va sa bhavissati ao att D I.187. Thus also in phrase aena aa opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin II.85 (paicarati make counter--charges); D I.57 (vyksi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln 171 (aa kayiramna aena sambharati). <-> anaa (1) not another, i. e. the same, self--same, identical M I.256 (= aya). -- (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn 65 (posin; opp. para) = Nd 4, cp. Nd2 36. -- (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti ana: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds. --disa different J VI.212, t difference PvA 243. --khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) D I.187; M I.487. --titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non--Buddhist.; D III.115; M I.494, 512; P II.21, 32 sq., 119; III.116 sq.; IV.51, 228; V.6, 27 sq.; A I.65, 240; II.176; IV.35 sq.; Vin I.60; J I.93; II.415. --dihika having diff. views (combd. with aa--khantika) D I.187; M I.487. --neyya (an) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent in one's views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para) Sn 55, 213, 364. --mano (an) (adj.) not setting one's heart upon others Vv 115 (see VvA 58). --vda holding other views, an (adj.) Dpvs IV.24. --vdaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin IV.36. --vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent--minded Vin IV.269; DhA III.352, 381; t distraction, absentmindedness DhA I.181. --saraa (an) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S III.42 = V.154. --sita dependent or relying on others Sn 825. Aatama (pron. adj.) [aa + superl. suff. tama; see also aatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14. Aatara (pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, aa + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article "a". Very frequent, e. g. Sn 35, 210; It 103; Dh 137, 157; J I.221, 253; II.132 etc. devaatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S IV.180 = A IV.461. Aattha (adv.) [from aa = aatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J I.291; II.154; DhsA 163; DhA I.212; III.351; PvA 45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14. Aatra (adv.) [anya + tra, see also aattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J V.252; Pv IV.162. In compn. also = aa, e. g. aatra--yoga (adj.) following another discipline D I.187; M I.487. -- As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. imin tapo-- pakkamena D I.168; ki karaya a. dhammacariyya S I.101; ko nu aatram--ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn 886 (= hapetv sa--mattena SnA 555). --ki aatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D I.90 (vusitav--mn k. a. avusitatt); S I.29 (k. k. a. adassan except from blindness); Sn 206 (id.). Aathatta (nt.) [aath + tta] 1. change, alteration S III.37; IV.40; A I.153; III.66; Kvu 227 (= jar C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln 209. -- 2. difference J I.147; It 11. -- 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin II.2; S III.91; IV.329. -- 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M I.448, 457 (+ domanassa); J I.33 (citta); PvA 195 (cittassa). Aath (adv.) [aa + th] in a different manner, otherwise, differently S I.24; Sn 588, 757; DhsA 163; PvA 125, 133. anaath without mistake Vv 4418; anaatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps II.104 (= tatha). --bhva (1) a different existence A II.10; It 9 = 94; Sn 729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D I.36; S II.274; III.8, 16, 42; Vbh 379. --bhvin based on difference S III.225 sq.; IV.23 sq., 66 sq.; an free from difference Vin I.36. Aadatthu (adv.) [lit. aad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all--round, absolutely (ekasa--vacane nipto DA I.111) only, at any rate D I.91; II.284; Sn 828 (na h aadatth atthi pasasa--lbh, expld. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasasa--lbhato ao attho atthi, cp. also Nd1

168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114. --dasa sure--seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D I.18; III.135, 185; A II.24; III.202; IV.89, 105; It 15. Aad (adv.) [aa + d, cp. kad, tad, yad] at another time, else, once S IV.285; J V.12; DhA IV.125. A (f.) [Sk. j, = + j, cp. jnti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. XXXIII.) M I.445; S I.4 (sammad), 24 (aya nibbuta); II.221; V.69, 129 (diheva dhamme), 133, 237; A III.82, 143, 192; V.108; It 39 sq., 53, 104; Dh 75, 96; Kh VII.11; Miln 334. -- aa vykaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin I.183; S II.51 sq., 120; IV.139; V.222; J I.140; II.333. See also arahatta. --atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv IV.114. --rdhana the attainment of full insight M I.479. --indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D III.219; S V.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. --citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S II.267; A III.437. --paivedha comprehension of insight Vin II.238. --vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn 1105, 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta--vimokkho). Aa (nt.) [a + a] ignorance; see a 3 e. Aaka (nt.) [Demin. of aa] ignorance Vin IV.144. Ain (adj.) [a + in] ignorant, not knowing DhA III.106. Ata1 Ata1 [pp. of jnti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn 699. an what is not known, in phrase anata--assm t indriya the faculty of him (who believes): "I shall know what is not known (yet)" D III.219; S V.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191. --mnin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A III.175 sq.; Th 1, 953. Ata2 Ata2 [a + ta] unknown, see ta. Ataka1 Ataka1 [a + taka, cp. Sk. ajti] he who is not a kinsman DhA I.222. Ataka2 Ataka2 (adj.) [Demin. of ata2] unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase vesena in unknown form, in disguise J I.14; III.116; V.102. Atar [n. ag. to jnti] one who knows, a knower of D II.286; M I.169; S I.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561. Atvin (adj. --n.) [from jnti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291. --indriya (tv indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aindriya (see a). Atukma (adj.) [ + jtu + kma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A III.192. See jnti.

Aya [ger. of jnti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S I.24; A III.41; Dh 275, 411. Aoa see aa B 2 c. Ahamna [Sk. anna, ppr. med. of anti, a to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have asamna. SnA 284 expls. by hrayamna. Aaa [BSk. aaa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to a roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A V.173 = Sn p. 126. Aaaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. aana, to a] roaming about, wild J V.105 (gv). Aan (f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin IV.168; Sm. Ps. on Pc. 14 (quoted Min. Pt. 86 and Vin IV.357); DhA I.234; J II.387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marthi ada a three--legged stand. See also Vin Texts II.53. Aala (adj.) [cp. Sk. aa & alaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aaliyo uphan strong sandals M II.155 (vv. ll. paaliye & agaliyo) = S I.226 (vv. ll. aliyo & aliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expls. gaanga--phan, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings I.291) trsls. "buskined shoes". Aav (f.) [Sk. aav: Non--Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J I.306; II.117; III.220; DhA I.13; PvA 277. <-> 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J VI.55 (= aavicor C.). --rakkhika guardian of the forest J II.335. --sankhepa at A I.178 = III.66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. sankopa "inroad of savage tribes". Aa1 Aa1 [cp. see aaka] a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin I.140; DA I.209. Aa2 Aa2 [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin IV.224; J II.2, 75; IV.129 ( vinicchinti to judge a cause), 150 ( treti to see a suit through); VI.336. Aa3 Aa3 [Sk. rta, pp. of ardati, d to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. rdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)/rda dirt. See also ayati & aita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 tura); Th 2, 439 (= aita ThA 270), 441 (= pita ThA 271); J IV.293 (= tura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often --: iaa oppressed by debt M I.463; Miln 32; cht tormented by hunger VvA 76; vedan afflicted by pain Vin II.61; III.100; J I.293; scik (read for scikaha) pained by stitch Pv III.23. --ssara cry of distress Vin III.105; S II.255; J I.265; II.117; Miln 357; PvA 285. Aaka [Demin. of aa1] a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin I.173; II.416; III.322, 372; DA I.209. Ana at Vin II.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as ahna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315). Ala [from aa] a watch--tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (kohaka) Th 1, 863; J III.160; V.373; Miln 1, 330; DhA III.488.

Alaka [Sk. alaka] = ala; J II.94, 220, 224; VI.390, 433; Miln 66, 81. Aita (& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv II.62; Th 2, 77, 89; Th 1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aa3] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th 1, 157; J II.436; IV.85 (v. l. addhita); V.84; VvA 311; ThA 270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs I.66; II.23; XIII.9; Sdhp 205. <-> See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47. Aiyati & Aiyati [Denom. fr. aa3, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with haryati, e. g. D I.213 (+ jigucchati); S I.131; M I.423; Pv I.102 (= a dukkhit PvA 48), freq. in ppr. aiyamna haraymna (+ jigucchamna) Vin II.292; J I.66, 292; It 43; Nd2 566; Ps I.159. <-> Spelling sometimes addiymi, e. g. Th 2, 140. -- pp. aita & addita. Aiyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA II.179. Aha1 Aha1 [Vedic aau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ata, Gr. o)ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in--a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. angula, nakha, pada, pda. B. The number in subjective significance. -- (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning "a couple" aha matakukkue aha jva--k. gahetv (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA I.213. sanghassa a salkabhatta dpesi VvA 75 = DhA III.104. a. pidaptni adada Vv 348. a. vattha--yugni (a double pair as offering) PvA 232, a ther PvA 32. -- The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a "royal" gift goes under the name of sabb--ahaka dna (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA II.45, 46, 71. In the same sense ah aha kahpa (as gift) DhA II.41; ah--ahak dibbka Vv 673 (= catusahi VvA 290); ahahaka Dpvs VI.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a "couple" in the phrase satt--aha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaha divas, a weck or so J I.86; J II.101; VvA 264 (savacchar years). -- (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aha kahpa J I.483; IV.138; VvA 76; Miln 291. -- In distances: a. kars DhA II.80; IV.217; PvA 258; a. usabh J IV.142. <-> (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of "a great many", hundreds, thousands. Thus aha sata 800, Sn 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a--sata--sahassa--vibhava DhA IV.7. But ahasata at S IV.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J V.377. -- aha sahassa 8000 J V.39 (ng). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahpurisa (see anuvyajana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattisa) VvA 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv II.75; asti--koivibhava DhA III.129; PvA 196; asti hatth ubbedho rsi (of gold) VvA 66, etc. See further references under asti. -- (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 ahdasa (only M III.239: manopavicr) & ahrasa (this the later form) VvA 213 (avenika--buddhadhamm: Bhagavant's qualities); as measure J VI.432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: ahrasa koiyo or koi, 18 kois J I.92 (of gold), 227; IV.378 (dhana, riches); DhA II.43 (of people); Miln 20 (id.); a. akkhohini--sankhsen J VI.395. a. vatth Vin II.204. -- 28 ahavsati nakkhattni Nd1 382; paisallagu Miln 140. -- 38 ahatis Miln 359 (rjaparis). -- 48 ahacattrsa vassni Sn 289. -- 68 ahasahi Th 1, 1217 sit savitakk, where id. p. at S I.187 however reads atha sahi--tasit vitakk); J I.64 (turiya--satasahassni) <-> 98 ahanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. IV.15) Sn 311 (rog, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). -- (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. asa and angika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) -- J V.409 (a. mangalena samanngata, of Indra's chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA 193 (ahahi akkhaehi vajjita manussabhva: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J IV.3 (aha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA 75 (a. kapparukkh at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA IV.3.

--asa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D I.76 = M III.121 (mai veuriyo a.); Miln 282 (mairatana subha jtimanta a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimna) J VI.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukat thambh); Vv 8415 (yatasa = yat hutv aha--soasadvattisdi--asavanto VvA 339). Of a ball of string Pv IV.328 (gulaparimadala, cp. PvA 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. --anga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aha in this connection), in compn. with upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sla & cp. anga 2), of uposatha, the fast--day A I.215; Sn 402 (Sn A 378 expls. ekam pi divasa apariccajanto ahangupeta uposatha upavassa); cp. ahanguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. In BSk. always in phrase anga--samanvgata upavsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. I.338, 399; also vrata Av. I.170. In the same sense ahangupeta pihriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn 402, where Vv 156 has susamgata (expld. at VvA 72 by pnipt verama--dhi ahah angehi samanngata). samanngata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rj, a king D I.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D II.211; J I.95; VvA 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. angopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. I.149. --angika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. ahang uposatha) Sn 401; of the "Eightfold Noble Path" (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as angika mrga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. angamrgadeika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D I.156, 157, 165; M I.118; It 18; Sn 1130 (magga uttama); Dh 191, 273; Th 2, 158, 171; Kh IV.; Vin I.10; Nd2 485; DA I.313; DhA III.402. --angula eight finger--breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J II.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula). --addha (v. l. addhaha) half of eight, i. e. four (pda) J VI.354, see also addha1. --nakha having eight nails or claws J VI.354 (: ekekasmi pde dvinna dvinna khurna vasena C.). --nava eight or nine DhA III.179. --pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA I.85: ekekya pantiy aha aha padni ass ti), cp. dasapada D I.6. -- 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross--plaited (of hair) Th 1, 772 (ahpada--kat kes); J II.5 (hapana = cross--plaiting). --padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin I.297; II.150. --pda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J V.377; VI.538; cp. Sk. aapda = arabha a fabulous eight--legged animal. --mangala having eight anspicious signs J V.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). --vanka with eight facets, lit. eight--crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J VI.388. --vidha eightfold Dhs 219. Aha2 Aha2 see attha. Ahaka (adj.) [Sk. aaka] -- 1. eightfold Vin I.196 = Ud 59 (vaggikni); VvA 75 = DhA III.104 (bhatta). -- 2. (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aham), in phrase rattsu antarahaksu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin I.31, 288 (see Vin Texst I.130n); M I.79; A I.136; Miln 396; J I.390. -- 3. (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (ah eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290. On sabbahaka see aha B 1 a. See also antara. Ahama (num. ord.) [Sk. aama, see aha1] the eighth Sn 107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. -- f. the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. ahak) A I.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa ctuddas pacadas ca aham); A I.142; Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.). Ahamaka = ahama the eighth. -- 1. lit. Miln 291 (att self--eighth). -- 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243--251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps II.193 (+ sotpanna). Ahna (nt.) [ + hna] stand, post; name of the rubbing--post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing--place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin II.105, 106 (read ahne with BB; cp. Vin II.315). Ahi1

Ahi1 [= attha (aha) in compn. with kar & bh, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti--kata (for citta), angi--bhta (for anga); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi--kata (besides manas--k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (kata & katv). Other explns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in combn. with katv: to make something one's attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase ahikatv manasikatv D II.204; M I.325, 445; S I.112 sq. = 189, 220; V.76; A II.116; III.163; J I.189; V.151 (: attano atthikabhva katv atthiko hutv sakkacca sueyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca, aya no attho adhigantabbo eva sallakkhetv tya desanya atthik hutv C.); Sdhp 220 (katvna). Ahi2 Ahi2 (nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o)/steon, o)/strakon, a)stra/galos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o)/zos branch Goth. asts] <-> 1. a bone A I.50; IV.129; Sn 194 (nahru bones & tendons); Dh 149, 150; J I.70; III.26, 184; VI.448 (vedhin); DhA III.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suruta III.5); KhA 49; PvA 68 (camma--nahru), 215 (goss); Sdhp 46, 103. -- 2. the stone of a fruit J II.104. --kankala [Sk. kankla] a skeleton M I.364; cp. sankhalika. --kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J V.406. --kalya beauty of bones DhA I.387. --camma bones and skin J II.339; DhA III.43; PvA 68 --taca id. J II.295. --maya made of bone Vin II.115. --mij marrow A IV.129; DhA I.181; III.361; KhA 52. --yaka (T. ahyaka) bones & liver S I.206. --sankhalik [B. Sk. akal Sp. Av. I.274 sq., see also ahika] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA III.479; PvA 152. --sangha conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism 21; DhA II.28; PvA 206. --sacaya a heap of bones It 17 = Bdhd 87. --sa the idea of bones (cp. ahika) Th 1, 18. --sahna a skeleton Sdhp 101. Ahika1 Ahika1 (nt.) [fr. ahi] 1. = ahi 1 a bone M III.92; J I.265, 428; VI.404; PvA 41. -- 2 = ahi 2 kernel, stone DhA II.53 (tl); Mhvs 15, 42. --sankhalik a chain of bones, a skeleton A III.324 see also under kaahika. --sa the idea of a skeleton S V.129 sq.; A II.17; Dhs 264. Ahika2 Ahika2 at PvA 180 (scik) to be read aita (q. v.) for aika. Ahita1 Ahita1 see hita. Ahita2 Ahita2 [ + hita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J II.247 (= adhihita C.). Ahita3 Ahita3 see atthika. Ahilla at Vin II.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaika, perhaps more likely = Sk. ahl a round pebble or stone. Addha1 (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaddha 1 1/2 (sata 150)

PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. addha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position upaddha (q. v.) is always used. --akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA IV.98. --aha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. ahaddha) S II.222 (ratana); J VI.354 (pda quadruped; v. l. for ahaddha). --ahaka 1/2 an ahaka (measure) DhA III.367. --uddha [cp. Mahrr form cauha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J I.82; IV.180; V.417, 420; DhA I.87; Mhvs 12, 53. --ocitaka half plucked off J I.120. --karsa (--matta) half a k. in extent VvA 64 (cp. aha--karsa). --kahpaa 1/2 kahpaa A V.83. --ksika (or ya) worth half a thousand ksiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin I.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts II.195); II.150 (bimbohanni, pillows; so read for addhakyikni in T.); J V.447 (a--ksigaik for a--ksiya a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a--k--gaik viya na bahunna piy manp). --kumbha a half (--filled) pitcher Sn 721. --kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross--seam Vin I.287. --kosa half a room, a small room J VI.81 (= a kosantara C.). --gvuta half a league J VI 55. --ca (vh vhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps misread for addhha (ha = haka, cp. A III.52), a half ha of rice. --tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA 66 (ms); J I.49, 206, 255 (sata 250). Cp. next. --teyya = tiya 2 1/2 Vin IV.117; J II.129 (sata); DA I.173 (v. l. BB for tiya); DhA I.95 (sata), 279; PvA 20 (sahassa). --telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaa] twelve and a half Vin I 243, 247; D II.6 (bhikkhusatni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA III.369. --dadaka a short stick M I.87 = A I.47; II.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. --duka see ruka. --nika (--matta) half a ni--measure full J VI.366. --pallanka half a divan Vin II.280. --bhga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaddhabhga VvA 61); Pv I.115. --madala semi--circle, semi circular sewing Vin I.287. --mna half a mna measure J I.468 (m. = ahanna nina nma C.). --msa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin III.254 (nak); A V.85; J III.218; VvA 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin IV.117; VvA 67; PvA 55. --msaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see msaka) J I.111. --msika halfmonthly Pug 55. --mudaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. --yoga a certain kind of house (usually with psda) Vin I.58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; II.146. Acc. to Vin T. I.174 "a gold coloured Bengal house" (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaa vankageha "like a Garua bird's crooked wing", i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. --yojana half a yojana (in distance) J V.410; DA I.35 (in expln. of addhna--magga); DhA I.147; II.74. --ratt midnight A III.40Q (a adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (rattya adv. = addharattiya VvA 315); J I.264 (samaye); IV.159 (id.). --ratti = ratt VvA 255, 315 (= majjhimayma--samaya); PvA 155. --ruka (v. l. duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin II.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: adhadukan ti udare lomarji--hapana "leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach". --vivata (dvra) half open J V.293. Addha2 Addha2 (adj.) [Sk. dhya fr. ddha pp. of dh, dhnote & dhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)/lqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic id refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also hiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well--to--do; usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahbhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahta--jtarparajata pahta vittpakaraa etc.). Thus at D I.115, 134, 137; III.163; Pug 52; DhA I.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = addho mahaddhano dhanav); DA I.281 (= issara); DhA II.37 (kula); Sdhp 270 (sataskh), 312 (gu), 540 sq. (id.), 561. Addhaka (adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J IV.495; Pv II.82 (= mahvibhava PvA 107). Addhat (f.) [abstr. to addha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316. Aa [Sk. a; see etym. under ia, of which aa is a doublet. See also aya] debt, only in neg. anaa (adj.) free from debt Vin I.6 = S I.137, 234 = D II.39; Th 2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A II.69; J V.481; ThA 245. Au (adj.) [Sk. au; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also i] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thla, q. v.) D I.223; S I.136; V.96 (bja); Sn 299 (anuto au gradually); J III.12 (= appamattaka); IV.203; Dhs 230, 617 (= kisa); ThA 173; Miln 361. Note au is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. matta. --thla (authla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh 31 (= mahanta ca khuddaka ca DhA I.282), 409 = Sn 633; J IV.192; DhA IV.184. --matta of small size, atomic, least Sn 431; Vbh 244, 247 (cp. M III.134; A II.22); Dpvs IV.20. The spelling is anumatta at D I.63 = It 118; Dh 284; DA I.181; Sdhp 347. --sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e.

residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3. Auka (adj.) = au Sn 146, KhA 246. Ada (nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. ada] 1. an egg Vin III.3; S II.258; M I.104; A IV.125 sq. -- 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin III.106. -- 3. (in camm) a water--bag J I.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69). --kosa shell of eggs Vin III.3 = M I.104; A IV.126, 176. --cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J IV.364, 366. --ja 1. born from eggs S III.241 (of snakes); M I.73; J II.53 = V.85; Miln 267. -- 2. a bird J. V.189. --bhrin bearing his testicles S II.258 = Vin III.100. --sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th 1, 599. --hraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M I.383. Adaka1 Adaka1 (nt.) = ada, egg DhA I.60; III.137 (saku). Adaka2 Adaka2 (adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of cadaka into c adaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aaQ] only used of vc, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M I.286; A V.265, 283, 293 (gloss kaak); J III.260; Dhs 1343, cp. DhsA 396. Aa (food, cereal). See passages under aparaa & pubbaa. Aava (nt.) [Sk. ara & arava to , oti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)/rnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah, cp. BSk. mahrava, e. g. Jtm 3175) M I.134; S I.214; IV.157 (mah udak); Sn 173 (fig. for sasra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J I.119 (kucchi), 227 (id.); V.159 (mah); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah). -- 2. a stream, river J III. 521; V.255. Aha [Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as -- in apar, pubb, majjh, sy, q. v. Atakkaka (adj.) [a + takka2] not mixed with buttermilk J YI.21. Ataccha (nt.) [a + taccha2] falsehood, untruth D I.3; J VI.207. Ati (indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. e)/ti moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ata/r but, Lat. at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely, very (cp. II.3) J VI.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahita C. = acchita T.). II. as prefix, meaning. -- 1. on to, up to, towards, until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimpeti to put damage on to, i. e. to destroy. -- 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans--; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atta past, gone beyond. -- Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow, abundance; atisra stepping over, sin. -- 3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b). -- (a) with nouns & adj.: sanna too near; uttama the very highest; udaka too much water; khippa too soon; dna excessive alms giving; drua very cruel; dgha extremely long; dra too near; deva a super--god pago too early; blha too much; bhra a too heavy load; manpa very lovely; manohara very charming; mahant too great; vikla very inconvenient; vela a very long time; sambdha too tight, etc. etc. <-> (b.) with verb: atibhujati to eat excessively.

III. A peculiar use of ati is its'function in reduplication--compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (), anu, ava, pai, vi (e. g. khadakhada, sehanusehi, chiddavacchidda, angapaccanga, cuavicua). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkaticakka macatimaca bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin IV.360 (Bdhgh); J II.331; IV.81; DhA IV.61. --devatideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mnatimna all kinds of conceit; vankativanka crooked all over J I.160. -- IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e. g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuha ati--jta, pita brheti, vassati, vyati, veheti. Note The contracted (assimilation--) form of ati before vowels is acc-- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya, atva. Ati--ambila (adj.) [ati + ambila] too sour DhA II.85. Ati--arahant [ati + arahant] a super--Arahant, one who surpasses even other Arahants Miln 277. Ati--issara (adj.) very powerful(?) J V.441 (bhesajja, medicin). Ati--uha (adj.) too hot PvA 37 (tapa glow). See also accuha (which is the usual form). Ati--uttama (adj.) by far the best or highest VvA 80. Ati--udaka too much water, excess of water DhA I.52. Ati--ussura (adj.) only in loc. Q (adv.) too soon after sunrise, too early VvA 65 (laddhabhattat eating too early). Ati--eti [ati + i] to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atta. Atikata (pp.) more than done to, i. e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree A I.62. Atikaddhati [ati + kaddhati] to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin III.17. Atikaha (adj.) [ati + kaha] too black Vin IV.7. Atikarua (adj.) [ati + karua] very pitiful, extremely miserable J I.202; IV.142; VI.53. Atikassa (ger.) [fr. atikassati ati + k; Sk. atikya] pulling (right) through J V.173 (rajju, a rope, through the nostrils; v. l. BB. anti). Atikla [ati + kla] in instr. atiklena adv. in very good time very early Vin I.70 (+ atidiv). Atikkanta [pp. of atikamati] passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing J II.128 (ti savaccharni); DhA III.133 (tayo vaye pas<-> sed beyond the 3 ages of life); PvA 55 (mse e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divas how many days have passed). --mnusaka superhuman It 100; Pug 60; cp. BSk. atikrnta--mnuyaka M Vastu III.321. Atikkantik (f.) [Der. abstr. fr. prec.] transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Miln 122. Atikkama [Sk. atikrama] going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dh 191; Dhs 299; PvA 154 (katipayayojan), 159 (caraa sinful mode of life); Miln 158 (dur hard to overcome); Sdhp 64.

Atikkamaaka (adj.) [atikkamaa + ka] exceeding J I.153. Atikkamati [ati + kamati] (1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass, to be superior to. -- J IV.141; Dh 221 (Pot. eyya, overcome); PvA 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanya to be overcome D II.13 (an); SnA 568 (dur). ger. atikkamma D II.12 (surpassing); It 51 (mradheyya, passing over), cp. vv. ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J IV.139 (samudda); Pug 17; J I.162 (raha having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. "beyond", e. g. pare beyond others PvA 15; Vasabhagma beyond the village of V. PvA 168. -pp. atikkanta (q. v.). Atikkameti [Caus. of atikkamati] to make pass, to cause to pass over J I.151. Atikkhippa (adv.) [ati + khippa] too soon Vin II.284. Atikhaa (nt.) [ati + khaa(na)] too much digging J II.296. Atikhta (nt.) = prec. J II.296. Atikhia (adj.) [ati + kha] in cpatikha broken bow (?) Dh 156 (expld. at DhA III.132 as cpto atikh cp vinimmutt). Atiga (--) (adj.) [ati + ga] going over, overcoming, surmounting, getting over Sn 250 (sanga); Dh 370 (id.); Sn 795 (sma, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha); Nd1 100 (= atikkanta); Nd2 180 (id.). Atigacchati [ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd sg. accag (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and accagam (see gacchati 2) Vin II.192; D I.85; S II.205; DA I.236 (= abhibhavitv pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accagu It 93, 95. Atigeti [ati + geti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi--glayati] to destroy, make perish, waste away J VI.211 (= atiglayati vinseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigheti (see atighita. Atigha (adj.) [ati + gha 1] very tight or close, intensive J I.62. Cp. atighita. Atighita [pp. of atigheti, Denom. fr. atigha; cp. Sk. atighate to overcome] oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated, destroyed J V.401 (= atipita C.). Atighora (adj.) [ati + ghora] very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285. Aticaraa (nt.) [fr. aticarati] transgression PvA 159. Aticarati [ati + carati] 1. to go about, to roam about Pv II.1215; PvA 57. -- 2. to transgress, to commit adultery J I.496. Cp. next. Aticaritar [n. ag. of. aticarati] one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery A II.61 (all MSS. read aticaritv); IV.66 (T. aticaritt). Aticariy (f.) [ati + cariy] transgression, sin, adultery D III.190. Aticra [from aticarati] transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cra VvA 72).

Aticrin (adj. n.) [from aticarati] transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticrin an adulteress S II.259; IV.242; D III.190; A III.261; Pv II.1214; PvA 151 (v. l. BB), 152; VvA 110. Aticitra (adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28. Aticca (grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn 373, 804 (= vassasata atikkamitv Nd1 120). -- 2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J V,424; VvA 72, Aticchati [*Sk. ati--cchati, ati + , cp. aava] to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) "please go on, Sir", asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'i "go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like "desire in excess", since i does not convey the notion of movement] J III.462; DhA IV.98 (T. aticcha, vv. ll. atha); VvA 101; Miln 8. -- Caus. aticchpeti to make go on, to ask to go further J III.462. <-> Cp. icchat. Aticchatta [ati + chatta] a "super"--sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours DhsA 2. Atitta (adj.) [ati + jta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijta] well--born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp. avajta). Atitarati [ati + tarati] to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari S IV.157 = It 57 (ri). Atituccha (adj.) [ati + tuccha] very, or quite empty Sdhp 430. Atituhi (f.) [ati + tuhi] extreme joy J I.207. Atitula (adj.) [ati + tula] beyond compare, incomparable Th 1, 831 = Sn 561 (= tula atto nirupamo ti attho SnA 455). Atitta (adj.) [a + titta] dissatisfied, unsatisfied J I.440; Dh 48. Atittha (nt.) [a + tittha] "that which is not a fordingplace". i. e. not the right way, manner or time; as wrongly in the wrong way J I.343; IV.379; VI.241; DhA III.347; DA I.38. Atithi [Sk. atithi of at = at, see aati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D I.117 (= gantuka--navaka phuaka DA I.288); A II.68; III.45, 260; J IV.31, 274; V.388; Kh VIII.7 (= n atthi assa hiti yamhi v tamhi v divase gacchat ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (= gantuka). Atidna (nt.) [ati + dna] too generous giving, an excessive gift of alms Miln 277; PvA 129, 130. Atidrua (adj.) [Sk. atidrua, ati + drua] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv III.73. Atiditthi (f.) [ati + dihi] higher doctrine, super knowledge (?) Vin I.63 = II.4 (+ adhisla; should we read adhi--dihi?) Atidiv (adv.) [ati + div] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin I.70 (+ atiklena); S I.200; A III.117. Atidisati [ati + disati] to give further explanation, to explain in detail Miln 304. Atidgha (adj.) [ati + dgha] too long, extremely long J IV. 165; Pv II.102; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa). Atidukkha [ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavca PvA

15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech. Atidra (adj.) [ati + dra] very or too far Vin I.46; J II.154; Pv II.965 = DhA III.220 (vv. ll. suvidre); PvA 42 (opp. accsanna). Atideva [ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha S I.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi); Miln 277. atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devatideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a. Atidhamati [ati + dhamati] to beat a drum too hard J I.283; pp. atidhanta ibid. Atidhtat [ati + dhta + ta] oversatiation J II.193. Atidhvati [ati + dhvati 1] to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of S III.103; IV.230; M III.19; It 43; Miln 136; SnA 21. Atidhonacrin [ati + dhonacrin] indulging too much in the use of the "dhonas", i. e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at DhA III.344, cp. dhona) Dh 240 = Nett 129. Atinmeti [BSk. atinmayati, e. g. Divy 82, 443; ati + nmeti] to pass time A I.206; Miln 345. Atiniggahti [ati + niggahti] to rebuke too much J VI.417. Atinicaka (adj.) [ati + ncaka] too low, only in phrase cakkava atisambdha Brahmaloko atincako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) DhA I.310; III.310 = VvA 68. Atineti [ati + neti] to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin II.180 (udaka). Atipadita (adj. [ati + padita] too clever DhA IV.38. Atipaditat (f.) [abstr. of atipadita] too much cleverness DhA II.29. Atipadna (nt.) [ati + pa + dna] too much alms--giving Pv II.943 (= atidna PvA 130). Atipapaca [ati + p.] too great a delay, excessive tarrying J I.64; II.93. Atipariccga [ati + pariccga] excess in liberality DhA III.11. Atipassati [ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupayati] to look for, catch sight of, discover M III.132 (nga). Atipta [ati + pat] attack, only in phrase patipta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder D I.4 (ptipt verama, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasla or decalogue); DA I.69 (= pavadha, paghta); Sn 242; Kh II. cp. KhA 26; PvA 28, 33 etc. Atiptin (adj. --n.) one who attacks or destroys Sn 248; J VI.449 (in war ngakkhandh = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditv C.); PvA 27 (p). Atipteti [Denom. fr. atipta] to destroy S V.453; Dh 246 (v. l. for atimpeti, q. v.). Cp. paripteti. Atipita (adj.) [ati + pita] too much beloved, too dear, too lovely DhA V.70.

Atipita [ati + pita, cp. Sk. abhipdita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J V.401 (= atighita). Atippago (adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually elliptical = it is too early (with inf. caritu etc.) D I.178; M I.84; A IV.35. Atibaddha [pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J I.192 = Vin IV.5. Atibandhati [ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati] to tie close to, to harness on, to couple J I.191 sq. -- pp. atibaddha q. v. Atibahala (adj.) [ati + bahala] very thick J VI.365. Atibha (adj.) [ati + bha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt. adv. too much D I.93, 95; M I.253. Atibheti [ati + bheti, Caus. to bh1; cp. Sk. bhati] to drive away, to pull out J IV.366 (= abbheti). Atibrahm [ati + brahm] a greater Brahma, a super--god Miln 277; DhA II.60 (Brahmu a. greater than B.). Atibrheti [ati + brheti, bh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to br; cp. Sk. abhi--bhayati] to shout out, roar, cry J V.361 (= mahsadda nicchreti). Atibhagini--putta [ati + bh.--p.] a very dear nephew J I.223. Atibhra [ati + bhra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (ena sakaassa akkho bhijjati). Atibhrita (adj.) [ati + bhrita] too heavily weighed, overloaded Vtn IV.47. Atibhriya (adj.) too serious DhA I.70. Atibhujati [ati + bhujati] to eat too much, to overeat Miln 153. Atibhutta (nt.) [ati + bhutta] overeating Miln 135. Atibhoti [ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati] to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive J I.163 (= ajjhottharati vaceti C.). Atimaati [Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 (= KhA 247 atikkamitv maati); Dh 365, 366; J II.347; Pv I.76 (issa, v. l. asi = atikkamitv avamai PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609. Atimaan (f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122. Atimanpa (adj.) [ati + manpa] very lovely PvA 77 (+ abhirpa). Atimanorama (adj.) [ati + manorama] very charming J I.60. Atimanohara (adj.) [ati + manohara] very charming PvA 46. (adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, 273, 488.

Atimamyati [ati + mamyati, cp. Sk. atmamyate in diff. meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J II.316. Atimahant (adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J I.221; PvA 75. Atimna [Sk. atimna, ati + mna] high opinion (of oneself), pride, arrogance, conceit, M I.363; Sn 853 (see expln. at Nd1 233), 942, 968; J VI.235; Nd1 490; Miln 289. Cp. atimaan. Atimnin (adj.) [fr. atimna] D II.45 (thaddha +); Sn 143 (an) 244; KhA 236. Atimpeti [ati + mpeti, Caus. of m, minte, orig. meaning "to do damage to"] to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pa atimpeti (with v. l. atipteti) to destroy life, to kill D I.52 (v. l. pteti) = DA I.159 (: pa hanati pi parehi hanpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); M I.404, 516; S IV.343; A III.205 (correct T. reading atimteti; v. l. pteti); Dh 246 (v. l. pteti) = DhA III.356 (: parassa jvitindriya upacchindati). Atimukhara (adj.) [ati + mukhara] very talkative, a chatterbox J I.418; DhA II.70. atimukharat (f. abstr.) ibid. Atimuttaka [Sk. atimuktaka] N. of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin II.256 = M I.32; Miln 338. Atimuduka (adj.) [ati + muduka] very soft, mild or feeble J I.262. Atiyakkha (ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller J VI.502 (C.: bhtavijj ikkhaka). Atiycaka (adj.) [ati + ycaka] one who asks too much Vin III.147. Atiycan (f.) [ati + ycan] asking or begging too much Vin III.147. Atiratti (adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidiv] late in the night, at midnight J I.436 (opp. atipabhte). Atirassa (adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidgha) Vin IV.7; J VI.457; VvA 103. Atirj [ati + rj] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king DhA II.60; Miln 277. Atiriccati [ati + riccati, see ritta] to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, 126. Atiritta (adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg. an applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin I.213 sq, 238; II.301; IV.82 sq., 85. Atiriva (ati--r--iva) see ativiya. Atireka (adj.) [Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta] surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree; extra Vin I.255; J I.72 (padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Miln 216; DhsA 2; DhA II.98. --cvara an extra robe Vin I.289. --pda exceeding the worth of a pda, more than a pda, Vin III.47. Atirekat (f.) [abstr. to prec.] excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607. Atirocati [ati + ruc] to shine magnificently (trs.) to outshine, to surpass in splendour D II.208; Dh 59; Pv II.958; Miln 336 (+ virocati); DhA I.446 (= atikkamitv virocati); III.219; PvA 139 (= ativiya virocati). Ativankin (adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J I.160 (vankativankin crooked all over; cp. ati III.).

Ativaati [ati + vaati] to surpass, excel D II.267. Ativatta [pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativtta] passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Sn 1133 (bhava); Nd2 21 (= atikkanta, vtivatta); J V.84 (bhaya); Miln 146, 154. Ativattati [ati + vt, Sk. ativartate] to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin II.237 (samuddo vela n); S II.92 (sasra); IV.158 (id.) It 9 (sasra) = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; Th 1, 412; J I.58, 280; IV.134; VI.113, 114; PvA 276. -- pp. ativatta (q. v.). Ativattar1 Ativattar1 [Sk. *ativakt, n. ag. to ati--vacati; cp. ativkya] one who insults or offends J V.266 (isna ativattro = dharusavchi atikkamitv vattro C.). Ativattar2 Ativattar2 [Sk. *ativart, n. ag. to ati--vattati] one who overcomes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svtivatt = durativatt duttar duppatar Nd1 76). Ativasa (adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 (= vase vattati DhA II.79). Ativassati [ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarati] to rain down on, upon or into Th 1, 447 = Vin II.240. Ativkya (nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativda, fr. ati + vad] abuse, blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 (= aha--anariyavohra--vasena pavatta vtikkama--vacana DhA IV.3); J VI.508. Ativta [ati + vta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Miln 277. Ativyati [ati + vyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vyati; cp. abhivyati ibid 385). Ativha [fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivha] carrying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sla, good character); J V.433. -- Cp. ativhika. Ativhika [fr. ativha] one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan) J V.471, 472 (purisa). Ativikla (adj.) [ati + vikla] at a very inconvenient time, much too late D I 108 (= suhu vikla DA I.277). Ativijjhati [Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh] to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details M I.480; S V.226; A II.178. Ativiya (adv.) [Sk. atva] = ati + iva, orig. "much--like" like an excess = excessive--ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atva (q. v.); -- (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D II.264 (v. l. SS. atva); Sn 679, 680, 683; SnA 486; <-> (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya J I.61, 263; DhA II.71 (a. upakra of great service); PvA 22, 56, 139. Ativis (f.) [Sk. ativi] N. of a plant Vin I.201; IV.35.

Ativissaha (adj.) [ati + vissaha] too abundant, in vkya one who talks too much, a chatterbox J V.204. Ativisssika (adj.) [ati + visssika] very, or too confidential J I.86. Ativissuta (adj.) [ati + vissuta] very famous, renowned Sdhp 473. Ativeheti [ati + ve, cp. Sk. abhiveate] to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin II.101; J V.452 (--ativiya veheti pieti C.). Ativela (adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. a very long time; excessively D I.19 (= atikla aticiran ti attho DA I.113); M I.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J III.103 = Nd1 504. Atilna (adj.) [ati + lna] too much attached to worldly matters S V.263. Atilkha (adj.) [ati + lkha] too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409. Atiloma (adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J VI.457 (opp. aloma). Atisacara (cra?) [ati + sacra] wandering about too much Miln 277. Atisaha (adj.) [ati + saha] too subtle DhA III.326. Atisanta (adj.) [ati + santa1] extremely peaceful Sdhp 496. Atisambdha (adj.) [ati + sambdha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA I.310; III.310 = VvA 68; cp. atincaka. <-> f. abstr. atisambdhat the state of being too narrow J I.7. Atisaya [cp. Sk. atiaya, fr. ati + ] superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance VvA 135 (= visesa); PvA 86; Dvs II.62. Atisayati [ati + ] to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitv Miln 336 (+ atikkamitv). Atisara (adj.) [fr. atisarati; cp. accasara] transgressing, sinning J IV.6; cp. atisra. Atisarati [ati + s] to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q. v.) Sn 8 sq. (opp. paccasari; C. atidhvi); J V.70 and atisari J IV.6. <-> ger. atisitv (for *atisaritv) D I.222; S IV.94; A I.145; V.226, 256; Sn 908 (= Nd1 324 atikkamitv etc.). Atisya (adv.) [ati + sya] very late, late in the evening J V.94. Atisra [fr. ati + s, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisra (satisra) in the same meaning) going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin I.55 (satisra), 326 (id.); S I.74; M III.237; Sn 889 (atisra dihiyo = dihigatni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith), J V.221 (dhamm), 379; DhA I.182; DhsA 28. See also atisara. Atisithila (adj.) [ati + sithila] very loose, shaky or weak A III.375. Atista (adj.) [ati + sta] too cold DhA II.85.

Atistala (adj.) [ati + stala] very cold J III.55. Atihaha (adj.) [ati + haha] very pleased Sdhp 323. Atiharati [ati + h] to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin II.209; IV.264; S I.89; J I.292; V.347. <-> Caus. atiharpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap, collect, harvest Vin II.181; III.18; Miln 66; DhA IV.77. <-> See also atihita. Atihita [ati + h, pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dh] brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Th 1, 381 (vhi). Atihna (adj.) [ati + hna] very poor or destitute A IV.282, 287; 323 (opp. accogha). Atiheti [ati + hd] to despise J IV.331 (= atimaati C.). Atta (adj.--n.) [Sk. atta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti] 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a) adj. atta addhna in the time which is past S III.86; A IV.219; V.32. -- Pv II.1212 (attna, scil. attabhvua, pariyanto na dissati); khaatta with the right moment past Dh 315 = Sn 333; attayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Sn 110. -- (b) nt. the past: atte (loc.) once upon a time J I.98 etc. atta hari he told (a tale of) the past, i. e. a Jtaka J I.213, 218, 221 etc. -- S I.5 (atta nanusocati); A III.400 (a. eko anto); Sn 851, 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to angata the future & paccuppanna the present, e. g. attangate in past & future S II.58; Sn 373; J VI.364. Or all three in ster. combn. att--angata--paccuppanna (this the usual order) D III.100, 135; S II.26, 110, 252; III.19, 47, 187; IV.4 sq.; 151 sq.; A I.264 sq., 284; II.171, 202; III.151; V.33; It 53; Nd2 22; but also occasionally atta paccuppanna angata, e. g. PvA 100. -- 2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2) S I.97 (maraa an not free from death), 121 (sabbavera--bhaya); A II.21; III.346 (sabbasayojana); Sn 373 (kappa), 598 (khaya, of the moon = nabhva atta Sn A 463); Th 1, 413 (c. abl.) -- 3. (id.) overstepping, having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dh 176 (dhamma). --asa the past (= atta kohse, atikkantabhaves ti attho ThA 233) D II.222; III.275; Th 2, 314. --rammaa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041. Atradassin (adj.--n.) [a + tra + dassin] not seeing the shore J I.46; VI.440; also as atradassan (f.) J V.75 (nv). Cp. D I 222. Atva (indecl.) [ati + iva, see also ativiya] very much, exceedingly J II.413; Mhvs 33, 2 etc. Ato (adv.) [Sk. ata] hence, now, therefore S I.15; M I.498; Miln 87; J V.398 (= tato C.). Atoa [etym.?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Miln 191. Atta1 Atta1 [ + d + ta; that is, pp. of dadti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d--to; cp. Sk. tta] that which has been taken up, assumed. atta--dada, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, S I.236; IV.117; Sn 630, 935; Dh 406. Attajaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Sn 790. Atta pahya Sn 800. The opp. is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection, he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories. See Nd I.82, 90, 107, 352; II.271; SnA 523; DhA IV.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attdna dyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin II.247 (quoted V.91). Atta2

Atta2 see attan. Atta3 Atta3 [Sk. akta, pp. of ajati] see upatta. Attan (m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) [Vedic tman, not to Gr. a)\nemos = Lat. animus, but to Gr. a)tmo/s steam, Ohg. tum breath, Ags. aepm]. -- I. Inflection. (1) of attan-- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attna D I.13, 185; S I.24; Sn 132, 451. -- gen. dat. attano Sn 334, 592 etc., also as abl. A III.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others). -- instr. abl. attan S I.24; Sn 132, 451; DhA II.75; PvA 15, 214 etc. On use of attan see below III.1 C. -- loc. attani S V.177; A I.149 (attan metri causa); II.52 (anattani); III.181; M I.138; Sn 666, 756, 784; Vbh 376 (an). -- (2) of atta-- (a--stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. atta Dh 379. -- instr. attena S IV.54. -- abl. attato S I.188; Ps I.143; II.48; Vbh 336. Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C. It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart. It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads J R A S 1899. Bt. India 251--255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul D I.31. Seven other theories D I.34. Three others D I.186/7. A soul according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow S IV.54 = Kvu 67; Vin I.14; M I.138. See also M I.233; III.265, 271; S II.17, 109; III.135; A I.284; II.164, 171; V.188; S IV.400. Cp. tuman, tuma, puggala, jva, satta, pa and nma--rpa. 2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. att, very rare. S I.71, 169; III.120; A I.57, 149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu VIII.84. Here att comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism) Sn 284; Dh 166, 380; Miln 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attna S I.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) A I.89; Sn 709. Acc. atta Dh 379. Abl. attato as oneself S I.188; Ps I.143; II.48; Vbh 336. Loc. attani A I.149; III.181; Sn 666, 784. Instr. attan S I.57 = Dh 66; S I.75; II.68; A I.53; III.211; IV.405; Dh 165. On one's own account, spontaneously S IV.307; V.354; A I.297; II.99, 218; III.81; J I.156; PvA 15, 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other D II.147; catuttha with himself as fourth M I.393; A III.36; pacama Dpvs VIII.2; sattama J I.233; ahama VvA 149 (as atta--nahama Vv 3413), & ahamaka Miln 291. anatt (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca -- (1) as noun: S III.141 (anupassin); IV.49; V.345 (sain); A II.52 = Ps II.80 (anattani anatt; opp. to anattani att, the opinion of the micchdihigat satt); Dh 279; Ps II.37, 45 sq. (anupassan), 106 (ya anicca ca dukkha ca ta anatt); DhA III. 406 (lakkhaa). -- (2) as adj. (pred.): S IV.152 sq.; S IV.166; S IV.130 sq., 148 sq.; Vin I.13 = S III.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1; S III.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhamm anatt Vin V.86; S III.133; IV.28, 401. --attha one's own profit or interest Sn 75; Nd2 23; J IV.56, 96; otherwise as atta--d--attha, e. g. Sn 284. --atthiya looking after one's own needs Th 1, 1097. --adhipaka master of oneself, self--mastered A I.150. --adhipateyya selfdependence, self--reliance, independence A I.147. --adhna independent D I.72. --anudihi speculation about souls S III.185; IV.148; A III.447; Sn 1119; Ps I.143; Vbh 368; MilnQ 146. --anuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dh 209; DhA III.275. --anuvda blaming oneself A II.121; Vbh 376. --u self--humiliation Vbh 353 (+ att--ava). --uddesa relation to oneself Vin III.149 (= attano atthya), also ika ibid. 144. --kata self--made S I.134 (opp. para). --kma love of self A II.21; adj. a lover of "soul", one who cares for his own soul S I.75. --kra individual self, fixed individuality, oneself (cp. ahakra) D I.53 (opp. para); A III 337 (id.) DA I.160; as nt. at J V.401 in the sense of service (self--doing", slavery) (attakrni karonti bhattusu). --kilamatha self--mortification D III.113; S IV.330; V.421; M III.230. --garahin self--censuring Sn 778. --gutta selfguarded Dh 379. --gutti watchfulness as regards one's self, self--care A II.72. --ghaa self--destruction Dh 164. --ja proceeding from oneself Dh 161 (ppa). -- knowing oneself A IV.113, cp. D III.252. --(n)tapa self--mortifying, self--vexing D III.232 = A II.205 (opp. paran); M I.341, 411; II.159; Pug 55, 56. --dada see atta1. --danta selfrestrained, self--controlled Dh 104, 322. --dihi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107; SnA 523, 527. --dpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraa, opp. aa) D II.100 = III.42; S V.154; Sn 501 (= attano gue eva attano dpa katv SnA 416). --paccakkha only in instr. ena by or with his own presence, i. e. himself J

V.119. --paccakkhika eye--witness J V.119. --paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin II.94, 96. --pailbha acquisition of a personality D I.195 (tayo: orika, manomaya, arpa). --paritpana self--chastisement, mortification D III.232 = A II.205; M I.341; PvA 18, 30. --paritt charm (protection) for oneself Vin II.110. --paribhava disrespect for one's own person Vbh 353. --bhva one's own nature (1) person, personality, individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. tmabhva body Divy 70, 73 (pratilambha), 230; Sp. Av. I.162 (pratilambha), 167, 171] Vin II.238 (living beings, forms); S V.442 (bodily appearance); A I.279 (orika a substantial creature); II.17 (creature); DhA II.64, 69 (appearance); SnA 132 (personality). -- (2) life, rebirth A I.134 sq.; III.412; DhA II.68; PvA 8, 15, 166 (att former lives). pavatteti to lead a life, to live PvA 29, 181. Thus in cpd. pailbha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin II.185; III.105; D III.231; M III.46; S II.255, 272, 283; III.144; A II.159, 188; III.122 sq. -- (3) character, quality of heart Sn 388 (= citta SnA 374); J I.61. --rpa "of the form of self", self--like only in instr. ena as adv. by oneself, on one's own account, for the sake of oneself S IV.97; A II.120. --vadha self--destruction S II.241; A II.73. --vda theory of (a persistent) soul D III.230; M I.66; D II.58; S II.3, 245 sq.; III.103, 165, 203; IV.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq.; Ps I.156 sq.; Vbh 136, 375. For var. points of an "attavdic" doctrine see Index to Sayutta Nikya. --vybdha personal harm or distress self--suffering, one's own disaster (opp. para) M I 369; S IV.339 = A I.157; A II.179. --vetana supporting oneself, earning one's own living Sn 24. --sacetan self--perception, self--consciousness (opp. para) D III.231; A II.159. --sambhava originating from one's self S I.70; A IV.312; Dh 161 (ppa); Th 1, 260. --sambhta arisen from oneself Sn 272. --sammpaidhi thorough pursuit or development of one's personality A II.32; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132. --saraa see dipa. --sukha happiness of oneself, self--success Dpvs I.66, cp. II.11. --hita personal welfare one's own good (opp. para) D III.233; A II.95 sq. --hetu for one's own sake, out of self--consideration Sn 122; Dh 328. Attaniya (adj.) [from att] belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul--like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul M I.138 = Kvu 67; M I.297; II.263; S III.78 (ya kho anattaniya whatever has no soul), 127; IV.54 = Nd2 680 F; S IV.82 = III.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3; S IV.168; V.6; Nd2 680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff. Attamana [atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh's expln. is saka--mano DA I.255 = att + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanat (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl. 12) = attano manat mentality of one's self] delighted, pleased, enraptured D I.3, 90 (an); II.14; A III.337, 343; IV.344; Sn 45 = Dh 328 (= upahita--satt DhA IV.29); Sn 995; Nd2 24 (= tuha--mano haha--mano etc.); Vv 14; Pug 33 (an); Miln 18; DA I.52; DhA I.89 (an--dhtuka displeased); PvA 23, 132; VvA 21 (where Dhpla gives two explns, either tuhamano or sakamano). Attamanat (f.) [abstr. to prec.] satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind M I.114; A I.276; IV.62; Pug 18 (an); Dhs 9, 86, 418 (an); PvA 132; VvA 67 (an). Atta (adj.) [a + ta] without shelter or protection J I.229; Miln 148, 325; ThA 285. Attha1 Attha1 (also aha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) [Vedic artha from , arti & oti to reach, attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose, Lat. causa] 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good, blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well--being M I.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); S IV.94 (id.); S I.34 (attano a. one's own welfare), 55 (id.) 86, 102, 126 = A II.46 (atthassa patti); S I.162 (attano ca parassa ca); II.222 (id.); IV.347 ( bhajati destroy the good or welfare, always with musvdena by lying, cp. attha--bhajanaka); A I.61 ( anubhoti to fare well, to have a (good) result); III.364 (samparyika a. profit in the future life); A V.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); It 44 (v. l. att better); Sn 37, 58 (= Nd2 26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att par ubhay, i. e. advantage, resulting for oneself, for others, for both; dihadhammik samparyik param gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i. e. Arahantship); Sn 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hiQ sakk supantena koci attho papuitu SnA 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv II.61); PvA 30 (attha sdheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparyikena atthena). -- dat. atthya for the good, for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitya sukhya, e. g. D III.211 sq.; It 79. -- Kh VIII.1 (to my benefit); Pv I.43 (= upakrya PvA 18), II.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6.

Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth, e. g. J I.256 (= vaddhi C.); III.394 (id.); Pv IV.14 (= dhana PvA 219). -- Often as --: att, one's own wellfare, usually combd. with par and ubhay (see above) S II.29; V.121; A I.158, 216; III.63 sq.; IV.134; Sn 75 (att-aha, v. l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta--d--attha); uttam the highest gain, the very best thing Dh 386 (= arahatta DhA IV.142); Sn 324 (= arahatta SnA 332); param id. Nd2 26; sad one's own weal D II.141; M I.4; S II.29; V.145; A I.144; sttha (adj.) connected with advantage, beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as "with the meaning, in spirit"? see sttha) D I.62; S V.352; A II.147; III.152; Nd2 316. -- 2. need, want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) S I.37 (jta when need has arisen, in need); J I.254; III.126, 281; IV.1; DhA I.398 (n atthi eteh attho I have no use for them); VvA 250; PvA 24 (yvadattha, adj. as much as is needed, sufficient = anappaka). -- 3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aha in cpds. ah--uppatti and aha--kath (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4. -- S III.93 (attha vibhajati explain the sense); A I.23 (id.), 60 (nt primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy secondary or inferred meaning); II.189 ( cikkhati to interpret); Sn 126 ( pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 ( akkhti); Th 1, 374; attho paramo the highest sense, the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning It 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Miln 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense); Miln 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyajanato by letter, orthographically); DhA II.82; III.175; KhA 81 (pad meaning of a word); SnA 91 (id.); PvA 15 ( vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammat "fitness of the best sense", i. e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho "this is the meaning", thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g. DA I.65; DhA IV.140, 141; PvA 33, etc. --4.Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pi) to be discussed, the "letter" and the "spirit". Thus at A I.69; V.222, 254; Sn 326 (= bhsitattha ca pidhamma ca SnA 333); It 84 (duho attha na jnti dhamma na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dh 363 (= bhsitattha c eva desandhamma ca); J II.353; VI.368; Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv III.96 (but expld. by PvA 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1). For the same use see cpds. dhamma, paisambhid, esp. in adv. use (see under 6) Sn 430 (yen atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v. l. BB for T attan), J I.411 (attha v kraa v reason and cause); DhA II.95 (+ kraa(; PvA 11 (aya h ettha attho this is the reason why). -- 5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter, affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as "this" or "that" S II.36 (ekena--padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); J I.151 (ta attha the matter); II.160 (ima a. this); VI.289 (ta attha paksento); PvA 6 (ta attha pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vutta attha what had been said), 82 (id.). -- (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aa2 and Lat. causa) Dh 256, 331; Miln 47 (kassa attha dhresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha. -- 6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthya for the sake of, in order to, for J I.254 dhan atthya for wealth, kim what for, why?), 279; II.133; III.54; DhA II.82; PvA 55, 75, 78. -(b) acc. attha on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute J I.279 (kim); III.53 (id.); I.253; II.128; Dpvs VI.79; DhA I.397; PvA 32 (dassan in order to see), 78, 167, etc. -- (c) abl. atth J III.518 (pitu atth = atthya C.). -- (d) loc. atthe instead of, for VvA 10; PvA 33; etc. anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition, mischief, harm, misery, misfortune S I.103; II.196 (anatthya savattati); A IV.96 ( adhipajjati) It 84 (janano doso ill--will brings discomfort); J I.63, 196; Pug 37; Dhs 1060, 1231; Sdhp 87; DA I.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. It 83 and Nd2 420 Q2); DhA II.73; PvA 13, 61, 114, 199. -- 2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense, false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable, no good, irrelevant) A V.222, 254 (adhammo ca); Dh 100 (= aniyynadpaka DhA II.208); Sn 126 (expld. at SnA 180 as ahita). --akkhyin showing what is profitable D III.187. --attha riches J VI.290 (= atthabhta attha C.). --antara difference between the (two) meanings Miln 158. At Th 1, 374, Oldenberg's reading, but the v. l. (also C. reading) atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma--dhara (q. v.). --abhisamaya grasp of the proficient S I.87 (see abhisamaya). --uddhra synopsis or abstract of contents ("matter") of the Vinaya Dpvs V.37. --upaparikkh investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma--savanna) M III.175; A III.381 sq.; IV.221; V.126. --uppatti (ah) sense, meaning, explanation, interpretation J I.89; DA I.242; KhA 216; VvA 197, 203 (cp. pito) PvA 2, 6, 78; etc. --kma (adj.) (a) well--wishing, a well--wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakma, e. g. Bhagavadgta II.5: gurn arthakman) S I.140, 197, 201 sq.; A III.143; D III.164 (bahuno janassa a., + hitakmo); J I.241; Pv IV.351; Pv A 25; SnA 287 (an). <-> (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) S I.44; PvA 112. <-> --kath (aha) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary J V.38, 170; PvA 1, 71, etc. freq. in

N. of Com. --kara beneficial, useful Vin III.149; Miln 321. --karaa the business of trying a case, holding court, giving judgment (v. l. aa) D II.20; S I.74 (judgment hall?). --kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) A II.230. --kmin = kma, well--wishing Sn 986 (devat atthakmin). --kra (abl.) for the sake of gain D III.186. --kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Sn 143 (= atthacheka KhA 236). --cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging S I.23 (narna = "working out man's salvation"). --caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e. g. an attendant, messenger, agent etc. D I.107 (= hitakraka DA I.276); J II.87; III.326; IV.230; VI.369. --cariy useful conduct or behaviour D III.152, 190, 232; A II.32, 248; IV.219, 364. --u one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhamma) D III.252; A III.148; IV.113 sq. --dassin intent upon the (moral) good Sn 385 (= hitanupassin SnA 373). --dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarika) J VI.286 (but expld. by C. as "saha--sukhuma--paa" of deep insight, one who has a fine and minute knowledge). --desan interpretation, exegesis Miln 21 (dhamm). --dhamma "reason and morality", see above n0. 3. anussaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy J II.105; DhA II.71. --pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text, motto A II.189; III.356; Dh 100. --paisambhid knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Ps I.132; II.150; Vbh 293 sq. --paisavedin experiencing good D III.241 (+ dhamma); A I.151; III.21. --baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Sn 382. --bhajanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting DhA III.356 (paresa of others, by means of telling lies, musvdena). --majjha of beautiful waist J V.170 (= sumajjh C.; reading must be faulty, there is hardly any connection with attha; v. l. atta). --rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (+ dhamma, vimutti) Nd2 466; Ps II.88, 89. --vasa "dependence on the sense", reasonableness, reason, consequence, cause D II.285; M I.464; II.120; III.150; S II.202; III.93; IV.303; V.224; A I.61, 77, 98; II.240; III.72, 169, 237; Dh 289 (= kraa DhA III.435); It 89; Sn 297; Ud 14. --vasika sensible It 89; Miln 406. --vasin bent on (one's) aim or purpose Th 1, 539. --vdin one who speaks good, i. e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kla bhta dhamma D I.4; III.175; A I.204; II.22, 209; Pug 58; DA I.76 (expld. as "one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter"). --savaan explanation, exegesis PvA 1. --sahita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary D I.189; S II.223; IV.330; V.417; A III.196 sq., 244; Sn 722 (= hitena sahita SnA 500); Pug 58. --sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps I.105. --siddhi profit, advantage, benefit J I.402; PvA 63. Attha2 Attha2 (nt.) [Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.] home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the "going home", i. e. setting of the sun, as disappearance, going out of existence, annihilation, extinction. Only in acc. and as -- in foll phrases: atthangacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dh 226 (= vinsa natthibhva gacchati DhA III.324), 384 (= parikkhaya gacchati); pp. atthangata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): J I.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); PvA 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Sn 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.); 1075 (= niruddha ucchina vinaha anupdi--sesya nibbna--dhtuy nibbuta); It 58; Dhs 1038; Vbh 195. --atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance SnA 409. --atthangama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance; opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) D I.34, 37, 183; S IV.327; A III.326; Ps II.4, 6, 39; Pug 52; Dhs 165, 265, 501, 579; Vbh 105. --atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) J I.101 (suriyass'atthagaman at sunset) DA I.95 (= ogamana). -- attha--gmin, in phrase uday atthagmin leading to birth and death (of pa): see udaya. --attha paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Sn 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28). -- Also atthamita (pp. of i) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v. l. at both pass.) DhA I.86; III.127. -- Cp. also abbhattha. Attha3 Attha3 pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q. v.). Atthata [pp. of attharati] spread, covered, spread over with (--) Vin I.265; IV.287; V.172 (also an); A III.50; PvA 141. Atthatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. attha1] reason, cause; only in abl. atthatt according to the sense, by reason of, on account of PvA 189 (--).

Atthara [fr. attharati] a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) D I.7. Attharaka [= atthara] a covering J I.9; DA I.87. -- f. ik a layer J I.9; V.280. Attharaa (nt.) [fr. attharati] a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin II.291; A II.56; III.53; Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40; 25, 102; ThA 22. Attharati [ + st] to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin I.254; V.172; J I.199; V.113; VI.428; Dh I.272. -pp. atthata (q. v.). -- Caus. attharpeti to caused to be spread J V.110; Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69. Atthavant (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthavant] full of benefit S I.30; Th 1, 740; Miln 172. Atthra [cp. Sk. stra, fr. attharati] spreading out Vin V.172 (see kahina). atthraka same ibid.; Vin II.87 (covering). Atthi [Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. ei)mi/--e)sti/; Lat. sum--est; Goth. im--ist; Ags. eom--is E. am--is] to be, to exist. <-> Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Sn 1120, 1143; J I.151; III.55, and amhi M I.429; Sn 694; J II.153; Pv I.102; II.82. <-> 2nd sg. asi Sn 420; J II.160 (si); III.278; Vv 324; PvA 4. -- 3rd sg. atthi Sn 377, 672, 884; J I.278. Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e. g. J I.280; II.2; III.55. -- 1st pl. asma [Sk. sma] Sn 594, 595; asmase Sn 595, and amha Sn 570; J II.128. 2nd pl. attha J II.128; PvA 39, 74 (gat attha you have come). <-> 3rd pl. santi Sn 1077; Nd2 637 (= savijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); J II.353; PvA 7, 22 -Imper. atthu Sn 340; J I.59; III.26. -- Pot. 1st sg. siy [Sk. sym] Pv II.88, and assa [Cond. used as Pot.] Sn 1120; Pv I.125 (= bhaveyya PvA 64). -- 2nd sg. siy [Sk. sy] Pv II.87. -- 3rd sg. siy [Sk. syt] D II.154; Sn 325, 1092; Nd2 105 (= jneyya, nibbatteyya); J I.262; PvA 13, and assa D I.135, 196; II.154; A V.194; Sn 49, 143; Dh 124, 260; Pv II.324; 924. -- 1st pl. assu PvA 27. <-> 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syu] Sn 532; Dh 74; Pv IV.136 (= bhaveyyu PvA 231). -- Aor. 1st sg. si [Sk. sa] Sn 284; Pv I.21 (= ahosi PvA 10); II.34 (= ahosi PvA 83). -- 3rd sg. si [Sk. st] Sn 994. -- 3rd su [cp. Sk. Perf. su] Pv II.321, 133 (ti pi pho for su). <-> Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dh 146; J I.150, 263, santa Sn 105; Nd2 635; J I.150 (loc. eva sante in this case); III.26, and samna (q. v.) J I.266; IV.138. --bhva state of being, existence, being J I.222, 290; II.415; DhA II.5; IV.217 (atthibhva v natthibhva v whether there is or not). Atthika (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthika] 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or ahika or ahita; in all cases atthika should be preferred D I.55 (vda); M II.212 (ahita); A III.219 sq. (ida atthika this is suitable, of good avail; T ahita, vv. ll. as above); Sn 1058 (ahita; Nd2 20 also ahita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aha and a--hita); J V.151 (in def. of ahikatv q. v.); Pug 69, 70 (T ahika, ahita SS; expld. by Pug A V.4 by kalyya). -- 2. (to attha1 2) desirous of (--), wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) A II.199 (uday desirous of increase); Sn 333, 460, 487 (pu), 987 (dhan greedy for wealth); J I.263 (rajj coveting a kingdom); V.19; Pv II.228 (bhojan in need of food); IV.11 (kra), 121 (khidd for play), 163 (pu); PvA 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DA I.70 (atthik those who like to). --anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) J V.460; PvA 20; of no good Th 1, 956 ("of little zeal" Mrs. Rh. D.). --bhva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug A V.4. (b) state of need, distress PvA 120. Atthikavant (adj.) [atthika + vant] one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand D I.90 (atthika assa atth ti DA I.255). Atthit (f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhva] state of being, existence, being, reality M I.486; S II.17 (a c eva natthita ca to be and not to be); III.135; J V.110 (kassaci atthita v natthita v jnhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394. -- Often in abl. atthitya by reason of, on account of, this being so DhA III.344 (idamatthitya under this condition) PvA 94, 97, 143. Atthin (adj.) (--) [Vedic arthin] desirous, wanting anything; see mant, vd.

Atthiya (adj.) (--) [= atthika] having a purpose or end S III.189 (kim for what purpose?); A V.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Th 1, 1097 (att having one's purpose in oneself), 1274; Sn 354 (yad atthiya on account of what). Atra (adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J I.414 = IV.5 (in expln. of atriccha). Atraja (adj.) [Sk. *tma--ja, corrupted form for attaja (see att) through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself, one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevsika p. Nd2 448. -- J I.135; III.103 = Nd1 504; J III.181; V.465; VI.20; Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57. Atriccha (adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at JA IV.4 is atra atra icchamna desiring here & there; but see atricch] very covetous, greedy, wanting too much J I.414 = IV.4; III.206. Atricch (f.) [Sk. *atpty, a + tpt + y, influenced by Desid. titpsati, so that atricch phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a.--tpsy (cch = psy, cp. P. chta Sk. psta). For the simple Sk. tpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atccha = ati + icch "too much desire", with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja. See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69] great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability J IV.5, 327. Atricchat (f.) [see atricch] excessive lust J. III.222. Atha (indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D II.2; III.152, 199 (athapara etad avoca); M I.435; Sn 1006, 1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athapara etad avoca: and further, something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J II.158; Pv II.64; PvA 3, 8 (atha na and not), 70. -- 2. after negative clauses: but M I.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd. with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then; but, rather, moreover Vin I.1; D I.141, 167, 174; A V.195; PvA 79, 221, 251. na--atha kho na neither--nor PvA 28. atha kho pana and yet D I.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J I.279. atha v or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134; Dh 140, 271; Pv I.41; II.14. ath v pi Sn 917, 921. Athabbaa [Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA I.247 = SnA 447 (veda). -- (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda J VI.490 (sathabbaa=sahatthivejja, with the elephant--healer or doctor). See also thabbaa. Atho (indecl.) [Sk. atho, atha + u] copulative and adversative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay S I.106; Sn 43, 155, 647; Dh 151, 234, 423; J I.83; II.185; IV.495; It 106; Kh VIII.7; Pv IV.315; PvA 251 (atho ti niptamatta avadhra--atthe v). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Sn 222, 537, 985; Pv II.320; KhA 166. Ada (adj.) (--) [to ad, see adeti, cp. ga, ha, da etc.] eating S IV.195 (kihada eating corn); J II.439 (vantada = vantakhdaka C.). Adaka (adj.) = ada J V.91 (purisadaka man--eater). Adana (nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J V.374 (v.l. modana). Adasaka (adj.) see das. Adsa [prob. = adasa, from dasati to bite, cp. dh tooth; lit meaning "toothless" or "not biting"] a kind of bird J IV.466. Adih [a + dih, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J IV.192 (T. adah, v. l. BB na dih, C. adisv); V.219. Adinna (pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn'dna (BSk. adattdna Divy 302) seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sla (dasa--sla see

sla II.). Vin I.83 ( verama); D I.4 (= parassa haraa theyya corik ti vutta hoti DA I.71); III.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M I.361; It 63; Kh II., cp. KhA 26. -- adinndyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattdyika Divy 301, 418) Vin I.85; D I.138; Sdhp 78. Adu (or du) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with adu, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. du) = Pv IV.317 (du) = DhA I.31 (T. du, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. du); J V.330 (T. du, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as adu ca adu ca kamma karoh ti). See also du. Adu nt. of pron. asu. Adsaka (adj.) [a + dsaka] innocent J V.143 (= nirapa<-> rdha C.); VI.84, 552. f. adsik Sn 312. Adsiya = adsaka J V.220 (= anapardha C.). Adeti [Sk. dayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J V.31, 92, 197, 496; VI.106. pot. adeyya J V.107, 392, 493. Adda1 Adda1 [cp. Sk. rdraka] ginger J I.244 (singivera). Adda2 & Add Adda2 & Add 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a. Adda3 Adda3 (adj.) [Sk. rdra, from dati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J IV.353; VI.309; Miln 346. --avalepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glittering S IV.187 (kgra); M I.86=Nd2 1996 (upakriyo). See also addha2. The reading allavalepana occurs at Nd2 40 (=S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as "newly plastered." Addakkhi 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b. Addas 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a. Add & Addyan at Vbh 371 in def. of andariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for d and dyana; see dariya. Addyate [v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J IV.351. See also allyati. Addi [Sk. ardri] a mountain Dvs II.13. Addita (pp.) [see aita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J I.21; II.407; III.261; IV.295; V.53, 268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281. Addha1

Addha1 (num.) [= addha, q. v.] one half, half (--) D I.166 (msika); A II.160 (msa); J I.59 (yojana); III. 189 (msa). Addha2 Addha2 (adj.) [= adda3, Sk. rdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M II.223 (na anaddhabhta attna dukkhena addhabhveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S III.1 (addhabhto kyo impure body); J VI.548 (nakha with dirty nails, C. ptinakha). Addhan (in cpds. addha) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch, length", both of space & time. -- Cases: nom. addh, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhun, acc. addhna, loc. addhani; pl. addh. See also addhna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J IV.384 = V.137 (pathaddhuno paarase va cando, gen. for loc. addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at IV.384 by ksa--patha--sankhtassa addhuno majjhe hito and at V.137 by pathaddhagato addha--pathe gaganamajjhe hito); Pv III.31 (pathaddhani paarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhte addhani gaganatala--magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half--way", i. e. on full--moon--day. He rejects the expln. of C. -- 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addh three divisions of time (atita, angata, paccuppanna) D III.216; It 53, 70. (b) in phrase dgha addhna (acc.) a very long time A II.1, 10 (digha addhna sasra); Sn 740 (dgha addhna sasra); Dh 207 (dgha addhna socati); J I.137. gen. dghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatatt because a long time has elapsed), instr. dghena addhun S I.78; A II.118; PvA 28. --yu duration of life A II.66 (dgha a long lifetime. --gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu II.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jia & mahallaka Vin II.188; D I.48 (cp. DA I.143); M I.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. --g [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S I.212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhag); J III.95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh 302. Addh (adv.) [Vedic addh, cp. Av. azd certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D I.143; J I.19 (a. aha Buddho bhavissmi) 66 (a. tva Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; III.340; V.307, 410 (C. expln. differs) Sn 47, 1057; Nd2 30 = Ps II.21 (ekasa--vacana nissasaya--vacana etc.) addh hi J IV. 399; Pv IV.15 2. Addhaneyya (adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting J V.507 (an). Addhaniya (adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th 1, 529. <-> 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D III.211; J I.393 (an) VI.71. See also addhaneyya. Addhariya [Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacrificing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D I.237 (brhmaa). Addhna (nt.) [orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dgha addhna. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhne (loc.) Miln 126; PvA 75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA 117 addhna = cira). Usually in phrase atta (angata etc.) addhna in the past (future etc.), e. g. D I.200; S I.140; A V.32; Miln 126 (angatamaddhne for a); PvA 75 (v. l. addhne). dgha addhna Pv I.105. Also in phrase addhna pdeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one's lifetime S IV.110; J II.293 (= jvitaddhna pdi yu vindi C). --daratha exhaustion from travelling DA I.287. --magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D I.1, 73, 79; M I.276 (kantr); DA I.35 (interpreted as "addhayojana gacchissm ti bhujitabban ti di vacanato addha--yojanam pi addhna maggo hoti", thus taken to addha "half", from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA 40, 292. Cp. also antarmagga. --parissama "fatigue of the road", i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA 305. --vemattat difference of time or period Miln 285 (+ yuvemattat).

Addhika [fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA I.298 (= pathvin), 270; PvA 78, 127 (jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaa beggar, tramp, as kapaaddhik (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J I.6 (v. l. iddhika 262; DhA II.26. Addhita at Pv II.62 is to be corrected to aita (sic v. l. BB). Addhin (adj.) (--) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dh 90. Addhuva see dhuva. Adrbhaka see dubbha. Advejjhat see dvejjhat. Adha in cpds. like adhagga see under adho. Adhamma see dhamma. Adhama (adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn 246 (naradhama), 135 (vasaladhama); Dh 78 (purisa); J III.151 (miga); V.394 (uttamadhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp 387. Adhara (adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J III.26 (adharoha the l. lip). Adhi [Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a + suffix--dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n--qa "on this" = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. de/ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to]. A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). -- (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + tman "this self here" (see C 1 b). B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjh (adhi + ), adhippa (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref.<-> cpd., like in pacc (prati + ), pary (pari + ) or ava in paryava (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud (abhi + ud), samud (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super"--(adhideva a super--god, cp. ati--deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref.--cpds. (ajjhvasati "to dwell here--in" = vasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). -- In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far--fetchedly) interpreted by abhibh "overpowering" see e. g. C. on adhihti & adhihita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, kodhita, jeguccha, brahm; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, ptcti, ppya, ppeta, bdheti, bh, vha. Cp. also ati IV. C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. -- (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) "wished for"; kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; kra commission; gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; gama attainment; gahti to overtake = surpass, peta (adhi + pra + ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; pya sense meaning, intention; bhsati to speak to = address; mutta intent upon; vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur--nom; vsna assent, vseti to dwell in, give in = consent. -- (b) where: tihati (hti) to stand by = look after, perform; hna place where; vasati to inhabit; sayana "lying in", inhabiting. -- 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi--jeguccha very detestable; matta "in an extreme measure", pa supreme lord; pacca lordship; pa higher, additional wisdom; vara the very best; sla thorough character or morality. -(b) with verbs (in double pref.--cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogheti plunge into; ajjhohapeti to bring down to (its destination); otthata covered completely; oharati to swallow right down. adhi + : ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapita quite

overwhelmed; vuttha inhabited; rhati grown up over; saya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; upeti to receive; upekkhati "to look all along over" = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire. Note. The contracted (assimilation--)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh-- (q. v.). Adhika (adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pug 35; VvA 80 (= anadhivara, visiha); DA I.141, 222; Dpvs V.32 (an); DhA III.238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, 447. -- compar. adhikatara DhA II.7; III.176; nt. as adv. extraordinarily PvA 86 (= adhimatta). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of "in addition, with an additional, plus" (cp. di + dika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as dika, i. e. preceding the noun--determination), e. g. catunahutadhikni dve yojana--sahassni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J I.25; sattamsadhikni sattavassni 7 years and 7 months J V.319; pasadhikni paca vassa--satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA 152. See also sadhika. Adhikata (adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikta] 1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv II.927 (dne adhikata = hapita PvA 124). -- 2. caused by Miln 67 (kamma). <-> 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln 144 (+ vimtijta). Adhikaraa (nt.) [adhi + karaa] 1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration PvA 209. <-> 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D II.59 (--: in consequence of); S II.41; V.19. Esp. acc. as adv. (--) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M I.410 (rpadhikaraa); S IV.339 (rga); Miln 281 (mudda for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimadhikaraa why, on account of what J IV.4 (= kikraa) yatvadhikaraa (yato + adhi) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D I.70 = A I.113 = II.16 = D III.225. -- 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivda anuvda patta kicca "questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties" Vin II.88; III.164; IV.126, 238; M II.247. <-> Often ref.: Vin II.74; S IV.63 = V.346 (dhamma a question of the Dh.); A I.53 (case), 79; II.239 (vpasanta); V.71, 72; Pug 20, 55; DhA IV.2 (ssa uppamassa vpasama), adhikaraa karoti to raise a dispute M I.122 vpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin II.261. --kraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin IV.230 (f. ik); A III.252. --samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at D III.254; M II.247; A I.99; IV.144. Adhikaraika [fr. adhikaraa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A V.164, 167. Adhikara (f.) [to adhikaraa 1, orig. meaning "serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument"] a smith's anvil J III.285; Dvs III.16 sq.; DhsA 263. Adhikra [cp. Sk. adhikra] attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin I.55; J I.56; VI.251; Miln 60, 115, 165; PvA 124 (dna; cp. Pv II.927); DhA II.41. Adhikrika (adj.) (--) [to adhikra] serving as, referring to Vin III.274 (Bdhgh). Adhikuan (f.) [adhi + koan or koana] an executioner's block Th 2, 58; cp. ThA 65 (v. l. kuddan, should prob. be read koana); ThA 287. Adhikusala (adj.) [adhi + kusala] in dhamm "items of higher righteousness" D III.145. Adhikodhita (adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J V.117. Adhigacchati [adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D I.229 (vivesa) M I.140 (anvesa n adhigacchanti do not find); S I.22 (Nibbna); II.278 (id.); A I.162 (id.); Dh 187, 365; It 82 (santi); Th 2, 51; Pug 30, 31; Pv I.74 (nibbuti = labhati PvA 37); III.710 (amata pada). opt. adhigaccheyya D I.224

(kusala dhamma); M I.114 (madhu--pidika); Dh 61 and adhigacche Dh 368. ger. gantv D I.224; J I.45 (nisase); and gamma Pv I.119 (= vinditv pailabhitv PvA 60). grd. gantabba It 104 (nibbna). cond. gacchissa Sn 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhag Sn 225 (= vindi pailabhi KhA 180); Dh 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhag J I.256 (vyasana) & ajjhgamu S I.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd1 457. <-> pp. adhigata (q. v.). Adhigahti [adhi + gahti] to surpass, excel S I.87 = DA I.32; D III.146; S IV.275; A III.33; It 19. Ger. adhigayha Pv II.962 = DhA III.219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetv It 20. -- pp. adhiggahta (q. v.). Adhigata [pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, conquered, attained, found J I.374; VvA 135. Adhigatavant (adj.--n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA 296 (Nibbna). Adhigama [fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D III.255; S II.139; A II.148; IV.22, 332; V.194; J I.406; Nett 91; Miln 133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA 207. Adhigameti [adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA 30. Adhiggahta [pp. of adhigahti] excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by (instr.), possessed J III.427 (= anuggahta C.); V.102; VI.525 = 574; It 103; Miln 188, 189; Sdhp 98. Adhicia only at S III.12, where v. l. is avicia, which is to be preferred. See vicia. Adhicitta (nt.) [adhi + citta] "higher thought", meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisla and adhipa Vin I.70; D III.219; M I.451; A I.254, 256; Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (sikkh); Dh 185 (= aha--sampattisankhta adhika--citta DhA III.238). Adhiceto (adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty--minded, entranced Th 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin IV.54 = DhA III.384. Adhicca1 Adhicca1 [ger. of adhi + eti, see adhyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J III.218, 327 = IV.301; IV.184 (vede = adhyitv C.), 477 (sajjhyitv C.); VI.213; Miln 164. Adhicca2 Adhicca2 (--) [Sk. *adhtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dh, cp. dhra, dhraa 3, dhreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: pattika guilty without intention M I.443; uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA 238; laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = J V.171 = VI.315 (expld. at J V.171 by ahetun, at VI.316 by ak<-> raena) samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D I.28 = Ud 69; D III.33, 138; S II.22--23 (sukhadukkha); A III.440 (id.); Ps I.155; DA I.118 (= akraa). Adhicca3 Adhicca3 (adj.) [= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S V.457. Adhijeguccha (nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D I.174, 176. Adhihaka (adj.) (--) [fr. adhihti] bent on, given to, addicted to J V.427 (sur).

[Sk. adhitihati, adhi + sth] 1. to stand on J III.278 (ger. ya); DhA IV.183 (ger. hitv); fig. to insist on Th 1, 1131 (aor. hi). -- 2. to concentrate or fix one's attention on (c. acc.), to direct one's thoughts to, to make up one's mind, to wish Vin I.115 (inf. htu), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. htabba) J I.80 (aor. ahi); III.278; IV.134 (v. l. ati C. expls. abhibhavitv tihati); DhA I.34; IV.201 (ger. hitv); PvA 23 (aor. hsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. hitv). On adhiheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. -- 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S II.17; A I.115 sq.; J I.50; PvA 209 (ger. hya). -- pp. adhihita (q. v.). Adhihna (nt.) [fr. adhi + sth] 1. decision, resolution, self--determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D III.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. pa, sacca cga upasama); J I.23; V.174; Ps I.108; II.171 sq., 207; DhsA 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). -- 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M I.136; III.31, 240; S II.17; III.10, 135, 194. -- As adj. (--) applying oneself to, bent on A III.363. -- 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln 309 (devna); PvA 141 (so read for adhitahna). [adihna as PvA 89, used as explanatory for vsa, should perhaps be read adhihna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode]. Adhihyaka (adj.) (--) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta DhA I.393. Adhihita (adj.) [pp. of adhihti] 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakala hna abhibhavitv hita VvA 269). -- (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin I.57; S V.278 (svadhihita); PvA 141 (kammanta). -- (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariya). Adhideva [adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M II.132; A IV.304; Sn 1148; Nd2 307b, 422 a. Cp. atideva. Adhipa [Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J II.369; III.324; V.393; Pv II.86 (jan king); Dvs III.52; VvA 314. Adhipaka (adj.) (--) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A I.150 (atta loka dhamma). Adhipajjati [adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A IV.96 (anattha); pp. adhipanna. Adhipa (f.) [adhi + pa] higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhna & pa); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisla Vin I.70; D I.174; III.219 (sikkh); A I.240; II.92 sq., 239; III.106 sq., 327; IV.360; Nd1 39 (id.); Ps I.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; II.11, 244; Pug 61. Adhipatati [adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J IV.111 (= ativiya patati sgha atikkamati C.). -- Caus. adhipteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipta. Adhipatana (nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA 271. Adhipati (n.--adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J IV.223; Vv 811; Miln 388; DhA I.36 (= seha). <-> 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh 216 sq. (chanda adhipati katv making energy predominant); DhsA 125, 126 (atta autonomous, loka heteronomous, influenced by society). See alo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60. Adhipateyya (nt.) A I.147; III 33 = S IV.275 is probably misreading for dhipateyya. Adhipatthita [pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D I.120. Adhipanna [cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by (--), a victim of (c. loc.) S I.72, Th 2, 345

(kmesu); Sn 1123 (tah = tahanugata Nd2 32); Dh 288; J III.38, 369; IV.396; V.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaa); VI.27. Adhipimokkha (nt.) [adhi + pimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin V.1 (pim +); M II.245 (+ ajjhjva). Adhipta1 Adhipta1 [adhipteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddh head--splitting Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd2 vipta). Adhipta2 Adhipta2 [from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn 964. Expld. at Nd1 484 as "adhiptik ti t uppatitv khdanti takra a. vuccanti"; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabh). Adhipatik (f.) [fr. adhipta2] a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 (see adhipta2). Adhipteti [Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhiptayati & P. atipteti] to break, split J IV.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibdheti (v. l. avibdeti. T. adhipteti). Adhippagharati [adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA 284. Adhippg 3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J V.59. Adhippya [adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprya] 1. intention, wish desire S I.124; V.108; A II.81; III.363 (bhoga); V.65; J I.79, 83; Sdhp 62. As adj. (--) desiring PvA 226 (hass in play = khiddatthika). -- 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln 148; PvA 8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). --adhippyena (instr.) in the way of, like PvA 215 (k for fun). Adhippyosa [adhi + pyosa] distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning M I 46; S III.66; IV.208; A I.267; IV.158; V.48 sq. Adhippeta [Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D I.120; II.236; VvA 312, 315. -- 2. meant, understood, intended as J III.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164. Adhippetatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52. Adhibdheti [adhi + bdheti, cp. Sk. abhibdhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipteti, v. l. avibdeti). Adhibrahm [adhi + Brahm, cp. atibrahm] a superior Brahm, higher than Brahm M II.132. Adhibhavati [adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S IV.185 sq. (cp. adhibh); A V.248, 282 (bhoti); J II.336; V.30. -- aor. adhibhavi J II.80. 3. pl. adhibhasu S IV.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabh pp. adhibhta (q. v.). Adhibhsati [adhi + bhsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhsi Vin II.195; S I.103; IV.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90. Adhibh (adj.) (--) [fr. adhi + bh, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibh] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S IV.186 (anadhibh not mastering. For adhibhta the v. l. abhi is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibh); Sn 684 (miga; v. l. abhi).

Adhibhta [cp. adhibh & adhibhta] overpowered S IV.186. Adhimatta (adj.) [adhi + matta of m] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. extremely M I.152, 243; S IV. 160; A II.150; IV.241; J I.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv II.36 (= adhikatara PvA 86); DhA II.85; cp. PvA 281. Adhimattata (nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A II.150; DhsA 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200). Adhimana (n.--adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn 692 (adhimanas bhavtha). <-> (adj.) directing one's mind upon, intent (on) J IV.433 (= pasannacitta); V.29 (an; v. l. mna). Adhimna [adhi + mna] undue estimate of oneself M II.252; A V.162 sq. Adhimnika (adj.) [fr. adhimna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A V.162, 169, 317; DhA III.111. Adhimuccati [Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S III.225; IV.185; A IV.24, 145 sq., 460; V.17; Pug 63. <-> 2. to become settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin I.209 (aor. mucci); D I.106; S I.116 (pot. mucceyya); It 43; DA I.275. <-> 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn 559; Miln 234; DA I.214, 316; J IV.272; V.103; DhA I.196; III.258; IV.170. <-> 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvvisati. J IV.172; V.103, 429; DhA I.196; III.258; IV.170. <-> pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. -- Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S V.409 (citta devesu a.). Adhimuccana (nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190. Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy--form mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M II.223 (an); S I.113; Th 1, 732 (v. l. muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J II.437 (cch); III.242; V.255 (kmesu mucchita, v. l. muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita. Adhimuccitar [n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A III.165 (v. l. mucchit). Adhimutta (adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. I.8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon (-- or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin I.183; A V.34, 38; Dh 226; Sn 1071, 1149 (citta); Nd2 33; J I.370 (dn) Pug 26; PvA 134 (dn). Adhimutti (f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D I.174; A V.36; Ps I.124; Miln 161, 169; Vbh 340, 341; DA I.44, 103; Sdhp 378. Adhimuttika (adj.) [= adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S II.154, 158; It 70; Vbh 339 sq. + t (f.) inclination D I.2. Adhimokkha [fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M III.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95. Adhiyita see adhyati. Adhiroha [fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur hard to ascend Miln 322.

Adhivacana (nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D II.62; M I.113, 144, 460; A II.70, 124; III.310; IV.89, 285, 340; It 15, 114; Sn p. 218; J I.117; Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nma sankh paatti etc.); Vbh 6; PvA 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340. --patha "process of synonymous nomenclature" (Mrs. Rh. D.) D II.68; S III.71; Dhs 1306; DhsA 51. Adhivattati [adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S I.101; A II.32. Adhivattha (adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin I.28; S I.197; J I.223; II.385; III.327; PvA 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J VI.370. Adhivara (adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA 80 = adhika, visiha). Adhivsa [fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur difficult to hold out Th 1, 111. (adj.) [fr. adhivsa] willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin IV.130; M I.10, 526; A II.118; III.163; V.132; J III.369 (an); IV.11, 77. Adhivsana (n.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A III.31; DhA I.33. -- 2. forbearance, endurance M I.10; J II.237; III.263; IV.307; V.174. Adhivsanat (f.) [abstr. fr. adhivsana] patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vbh 360 (an). Adhivseti [Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. acc.) J I.254; II.352; III.277. -- 2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) D II.128, 157; J I.46; III.281 (pahre); IV.279, 407; V.51, 200; VvA 336, 337. -- 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin I.17; D I.109 (cp. DA I.277); S IV.76; DhA I.33; PvA 17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. -- Caus. adhivspeti to cause to wait J I.254. Adhivha [fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S IV.70 (dukkha); A I.6; Th 1, 494. Adhivhana (nt.--adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn 79; f. Th 1, 519. Adhivimuttatta (nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J V.254 (T. kmdhivimuttit, v. l. muttata). Adhivimokkhatta (nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA 261. Adhivutti (f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhivadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti--p. at all passages) D I.13 (expld. by adhivacana--pada DA I.103); M II.228; A V.36. Adhivuttha see adhivattha. Adhisayana (nt.--adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA 80 (maca). Adhisayita [pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin III.3; S III.153. Adhisla (nt.) [adhi + sla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta--sikkha, adhipa adhisla Vin I.70; D I.174; III.219; A III.133; IV.25; DhA I.334; PvA 207. See also adhicitta, sikkh & sla.

Adhiseti [adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh 41; Sn 671 (= gacchati C.) -- pp. adhisayita. Adhna (adj.) (--) [cp. Sk. adhna] subject, dependent D I.72 (atta & para); J IV.112; DA I.217; also written dhna J V.350. See also under para. Adhyati & adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhye taken as base in Pli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin I.270; S I.202 (dhammapadni); J IV.184 (adhyitv), 496 (adhyamna); VI.458; DhA III.446 (adhyassu). -- ger. adhyitv J IV.75; adhiyna J V.450 (= sajjhyitv C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D I.96. Adhun (adv.) [Vedic adhun] just now, quite recently D II.208; Vin II.185 (klakata); Miln 155; Dvs II.94. --gata a new comer M I.457; J II.105. --abhisitta newly or just anointed D II.227. --uppanna just arisen D II.208, 221. Adhura (nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J IV.241. Adho (adv.) [Vedic adha; compar. adhara = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *ndher--; superl. adhama = Lat. infimus] below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddha "above" and tiriya "across", describing the 3 dimensions. -uddha and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddha and the 4 bearings (dis) and intermediate points (anudis) at S I.122; III.124; A IV.167; with uddha & tiriya at Sn 150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heh and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddha. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh. --akkhaka beneath the collar--bone Vin IV.213. --agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh expld. by uparima--danta C.). --kata turned down, or upside down J I.20; VI.298. --gata gone by, past. Adv. since (cp. uddha adv. later or after) J VI.187 (ito msa adhogata since one month ago). --gala (so read for T. udho) down the throat PvA 104. --mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin II.78; M I.132, 234: Vv 161 (= heh mukha VvA 78). --bhga the lower part (of the body) M I.473; DhA I.148. --virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha of an emetic) D I.12; DA I.98 (= adho dosna nharaa); DhsA 404. --skha (+ uddhamla) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA I.75. --sira (adj.) head downward J IV.194. --sira (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avasira) J VI.298 (= sira adhokatv hehmukho C.). --ssa (adj.) head first, headlong J I.233; v.472 (ka). An-- form of the neg. prefix a--before vowels. For negatives beginning with an see the positive. Ana-- negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts II.113. Anajjhiha (adj.) [an + ajjhiha] uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin I.113; Pv I.123 (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiha; J III.165 has anavhta; Th 2, 129 aycita; PvA 64 expls. by anavhta). Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA I.124 (in def. of bla); DA I.244 (read ananti for aanti). Cp. pa. Anabhva [ana + bhva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhva kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin III.3 of bad qualities, at S II.63 of certain wrong opinions, at M I.487; S IV.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M I.331 of the Mental Intoxications (savas), at A IV.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A I.135, of evil passions A I.137, 184, 218; II.214 of pride A II.41, of craving A II.249, of the bonds A IV.8. In the supplement to the Dgha (D III.326) and in the Iti--vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhva gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin III.267) reports as v. l. anubhva. Cp. Nd I.90; and Nd2 under pahna. Anabbhita (adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin IV.242; Pv I.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th 2, 129 has aycita & at J III.165 anavhta; PvA 64 expls. by anavhta, v. l. anabbhita).

Anabhuatat (f.) [an + abbhuata + t] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156. Anabhijjh (f.) [an + abhijjh] absence of covetousness or desire D III.229, 269; Dhs 32, 35, 277. Anabhijjhl (adj.) [an + abhijjhl] not greedy or covetous D III.82; Pug 40. Anabhijjhita (adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn 40 (cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201). Anabhinandati etc. see abhi etc. Anabhirata (adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J I.61 (naccadisu). Anabhirati (f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent D I.17 (+ paritassan); III.289; J III. 395; DA I.111. Anabhiraddha (adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin IV.236. Anabhiraddhi (f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D I.3 (= kopasseta adhivacana DA I.52). Anabhisambhuamna (adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisambhuti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D I.101 (= asamppuanto avisahamno v DA I.268). Anamatagga (adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + agg (pl.). So Dhammapla (avidit--agga ThA 289); Nakitti in k on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts II.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzhl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavargra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. III.150 suggests an + mrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Sasra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S II.178, 187 sq. = III.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga--pariyya at DhA II.268) and Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA I.11; II.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom "world without end". The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Sayutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga--system of Patajali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yog, to understand the beginning and end of Sasra]. Anamha (adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana--mha "unlaughing" with ana = an (cp. anabhva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J III. 223 (kle = rodana--kle C.). Anaya [a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin II.199; S IV.159; A v.156; Miln 292; VvA 327; Sdhp 362. Anariya (adj.) [an + ariya, see also anriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin I.10; D III.232 (vohra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn 664, 782 (dhamma); Pug 13. -- See ariya. Anala (adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M I.455; J II.326 = IV. 471. -- 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). <-> 3. kata dissatisfied, satiated, S I.15 (kmesu). Anavaya (adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling D I.88 (= anna paripra--krin DA I.248); A III.152 (= samatta paripua AA quoted by Tr. on Miln 10). Anavosita (adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.

Anasana (nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an--aana] not eating, fasting, hunger D III.75 & in same context at Sn 311 (= khud SnA 324). Anasitvna [ger. of an + aati] without eating, fasting J IV.371. Anasuyya [Sk. anasyan, ppr. of an + asyati] not grumbling J III.27 (v. l. for anusuyya T.). Anasuropa [an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs 1341. Anasyaka (adj.) [Sk. anasyaka, cp. usya] not grumbling, not envious J II.192. Anassaka (adj.) either an--assaka or a--nassaka (q. v.). Anassana (nt.) [a + nassana, na; cp. Sk. naana] imperishableness, freedom from waste J IV.168. Anassvin (adj.) [an + assvin; cp. assva + sava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (stiyesu a. = stavatthusa kmaguesu tahasanthavavirahita SnA 549). Anasssika (adj.) [an + asssa + ika; cp. Sk. vsana & BSk. anvsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M I.514; S II.191. Anassu 1st sq, pret. of anusyati (= Sk. anvaruva) I have heard M I.393. Angata (adj.) [an + gata] not come yet, i. e. future. On usual combn. with atta: see this. D III.100 sq., 134 sq., 220, 275; M III.188 sq.; S I.5; II.283; A III.100 sq., 400; Sn 318, 373, 851; It 53; J IV.159; VI.364; Dhs 1039, 1416. Angamana (nt.) [an + gamana] not coming, not returning J I 203, 264. Angmit (f.) [angmin + t] the state or condition of an Angmin S v.129, 181, 285; A III.82; v.108, 300 sq.; Sn p. 140 = A III.143; It 1 sq., 39, 40. Angmin (adj.--n.) [an + gmin] one who does not return, a Never--Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Sayojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Angmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does not use the word angmin (D I.156; II.92; III.107; M II.146) and angmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S III.168, the anatta doctrine; S v.200--2, the five Indriyas; A I.64, 120, cultivation of good qualities, II 160; v.86, 171 = S 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called angmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D II.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but they are not called angmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Angmin, and the Arahant; and the Sayojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Sayojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Ps II.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69. --phala fruition of the state of an Angmin; always in combn. sotpatti sakadgmi angmi arahatta Vin I.293; II.240; IV.29; D I.229; II.227, 255; S III.168; v.411; A I.23, 44; III.272 sq.; IV.204, 276, 372 sq. --magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b.

Angra & Angriy see agra & agriy. Anghta [an + ghta] freedom from anger or ill--will Vin II.249. Ancra [an + cra] misconduct, immorality J II.133; III. 276; adj. ancrin Pug 57. Anjniya (adj.) [an + jniya] of inferior race, not of good blood M I.367. Andara [an + dara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. -- (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Sn 247 (= daravirahita SnA 290). Andarat (f.) [abstr. fr. andara] want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassat at Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is andariyat). Andariya (nt.) [fr. andara] disregard, disrespect Vin I.176; IV.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 = dug 20 = Vbh 359. And [ger. of an + diyati] without taking up or on to oneself Vin IV.120 (= andiyitv C.). Andna (adj.) [an + dna] free from attachment (opp. sdna) A II.10 = It 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a; Sn 620, 741, 1094; Nd2 41 (where as nt. = taha); Dh 352 (= khandhdisu niggahaa DhA IV.70), 396, 406, 421. Anditv [ger. of an + diyati] not taking up, not heeding J IV.352 (v. l. for T. andiyitv). Andiyitv [ger. of an + diyati, Sk. andya] without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin IV.120; J IV.352; DhA I.41. See also diyati. Annu-- represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu<-> (an + anu), as found e. g. in the foll. cpds.: tappa (ppr.) not regretting J v.492; puha questioned Sn 782 (= apucchita SnA 521); yyin not following or not defiled by evil Sn 1071 (expld. at Nd2 42 by both avedhamna (?) avigacchamna & by arajjamna adussamna); loma not fit or suitable D II.273 (v. l. anu). Anpthagata (adj.) [an + ptha + gata] not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him M I.174. Anpda (adj.) [an + pda] unmarried (of a woman) J IV.178 (pda = apdna C.; aehi akata--pariggah). Anpucch see pucchati. Anbdha (adj.) [an + bdha] safe and sound VvA 351. Anmata (adj.) [an + amata the being due to metrical lengthening] not affected by death, immortal J II.56 (= asusna--hna C.); DhA II.99. Anmanta (--) [an + manta] without asking or being asked; in kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited J VI.226; cra living uninvited Vin v.132; A III.259. Anmaya (adj.) [an + maya] free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74), 177. Anmasita (adj.) [an + masita, pp. of massati] not touched, virgin-- VvA 113 (khetta). Anmassa (adj.) [grd. of an + massati, Sk. maya] not to be touched J II 360 (C. anmsitabba).

Anyatana (nt.) [an + yatana] nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence J v.121 (sla = dussla C.). Anyasa (adj.) [an + ya + sa, or should we read anysa?] void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha yo sukhan ti anyasa VvA 335). Anysa (adj.) [an + ysa] free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Th 1, 1008. Anrambha [an + rambha] that which is without moil and toil Sn 745 (= nibbna SnA 507). Anrdhaka (adj.) [an + rdhaka] one who fails, unsuccessful Vin I.70. Anriya (adj.) [doublet of anariya] not Aryan, ignoble, Sn 815 (v. l. SS. anariya). Anlamba (adj.) [an + lamba] without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Sn 173 (+ appatiha; expld. at SnA 214 by heh patihabhvena upari lambhvena ca gambhra). Anlaya [an + laya] aversion, doing away with Vin I.10 (tahya). Anhiya & Anhika (adj.) [an + lhiya, Sk. dhya, see also addhaQ] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daidda M I.450; II.178 (v. l. BB. aniya); A III.352 sq. (vv. ll. BB. anhika), 384; J v.96. Anvaa (--) [an + vaa] not shut; in dvrat (f.) not closing the door againt another, accessibility, openhand edness D III.191. Anvattin (adj.--n.) [an + vattin] one who does not return, almost syn. with angmin in phrase anvatti--dhamma, one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, D I.156 (cp. DA I.313); III.132; Pug 16 sq., 62. Anvasra (adv.) [an + ava + sra = suriya, with ava lengthened to va in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun--down J v.56 (= anatthangata--suriya C.) cp. Sk. utsra. Anvsa (adj.--n.) [an + vsa] uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin II.22, 33; J II.77. Anvikata etc. see vikata. Anvila (adj.) [an + vila] undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure D I.84 (= nikkaddama DA I.226); III.269, 270; Sn 637 (= nikkilesa SnA 469 = DhA IV.192); Th 2, 369 (vilacitta +); Dh 82, 413; ThA 251; Sdhp 479. Anvuttha (adj.) [an + vuttha, pp. of vasati] not dwelt in D .II50. Ansaka (adj.) [an + saka] fasting, not taking food S IV.118. f. [cp. Sk. anaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dh 141 (= bhatta--paikkhepa DhA III.77). Ansakatta (nt.) [abstr. of ansaka] fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292). Ansava (adj.) [an + sava] free from the 4 intoxications (see sava) Vin II.148 = 164; D III.112; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Nd2 44; It 75; Pug 27, Dhs 1101, 1451; Vbh 426; Th 1, 100; Pv II.615; VvA 9. See sava and cp. nirsava. Ansasna (adj.) [an + sasna] not longing after anything Sn 369 (SnA 365 however reads ansayna & has ansasna as v. l. Cp. also vv. ll. to sasna. Expld by kaci rpadi--dhamma nasisati SnA 365.

Anhra (adj.) [an + hra] being without food M I.487; Sn 985. Anikkaddhan (f.) [a + nikkaddhan] not throwing out or expelling J III.22. Anikkasva (adj.) [a + nikkasva, cp. nikasva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh 9 = Th 1, 969 = J II.198 = v.50; DhA I.82 (= rgadhi kasvehi sakasva). Anikhta (adj.) [a + nikhta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J VI.109 (kla; C. agambhr). Anigha see nigha1 see nigha1 and gha. Anicch (f.) [an + icch] dispassion S v.6; adj. a without desires, not desiring Sn 707. Anijana (nt.) [an + ijana] immobility, steadfastness Ps I.15. Anijita (adj.) [an + ijita] immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Th 1, 386. Anihangata see nih2. Anihita see nihita. Anitthi (f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, "nonwoman" J II.126 (compd with anad a river without water; interpreted by ucchih--itthi). Anindi-- [the compn. form of nind] in ocana (with) faultless eyes J VI.265. Anindita (adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J IV.106 (angin of blameless body or limbs). Anibbisa [ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th 1, 78 = Dh 153 (= ta a avindanto DhA III.128). Animisa (adj.) [Ved. animea, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dvs v.26 (nayana). Aniyata (adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin I.112; II.287; D III.217. Aniyamita (adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA 231. Anila [from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J IV.119 (patha air, sky); Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594. Anirkata (adj.) [a + nirkata] see nirankaroti. Anissara (adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th 1, 713. Anissukin (adj.) [an + issukin, see also an--ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D III.47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under nihurin). Anka (nt.) [Ved. anka face, front, army to Idg. *og (see), cp. Gr. o)/mma eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratka and P. akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battle--array) Vin IV.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala strong in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp. SnA 467).

--agga a splendid army Sn 421 (= balakya senmukha SnA 384). --ha a sentinel, royal guard D III.64, 148; J v.100; VI.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234, 264. --dassana troop--inspection D I.6 (aka at DA I.85, q. v. interpretation); Vin IV.107 (senbyha +). Angha see nigha1 see nigha1 and cp. gha. Anti (f.) [an + ti] safety, soundness, sound condition, health A IV.238; Miln 323 (abl. ito). Antika (adj.) [fr. anti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin II.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); III.162; S IV.371; Sn 1137 (t vuccanti kiles etc. Nd2 48); Miln 304. Antiha (adj.) [an + tha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihsa & itihtiha] not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk A II.26; Th 1, 331 (cp. M I.520); Sn 1053 (= Nd2 49, 151); J I.456; Nett 166 (cp. It 28). Anu1 Anu1 (indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a)/nw to a)/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. -- A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. <-> Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pacha by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyn day by day); a. vassa for one year or yearly; a. savacchara id. -- (b) More freq. w. loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tre by the bank S IV.177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveiya in every cell Vin I.80; magge along the road J v.201; vte with the wind J II.382. B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well--defined meaning ("along"), as such also as 1st component of pref.--cpds., e. g. anu + (anv), anu + pra (anuppa), + pari, + vi, + sa. -- As base, i. e. 2nd part of a pref.--cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam--anu. The prefix sa is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is pai and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. loma, vta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: "along towards". -- (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g. aya going after, connexion; gacch follow, kkamati follow, dhvati run after, patta received, parivattati move about after, bandhati run after, bala rear--guard, bhsati speak after, repeat, vda speaking after, blame, vicarati roam about viloketi look round after (survey), sacarati proceed around etc. -- (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref.--cpds. (esp. with ppa), e. g. anu--disati design for, dedicate kankhin longing for, cintana care for, tihati look after, padinna given over to, pavecchati hand over, paviha entered into, pasakamati go up to, rodati cry for, socati mourn for. -- II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be-- or Ger. be--, also Lat. ad-- and con--. Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. kamp com--passion, kia be--set, gahti take pity on, gyati be--singen, jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ddaya pity with, masati touch at, yujati order along, yoga devotion to, rakkhati be--guard, litta be--smeared or an--ointed, vitakheti reflect over, sara con--sequential; etc. -- (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. kla being to will, chavika befitting, ta permitted, al--lowed, mati con- sent, a--greement, madati ap--preciate, rpa = con--form, vattin acting according to, ssavana by hearsay, ssati ad--vise, com--mand etc. -- III. (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. dhamma lesser morality, pabbaj discipleship, pavattaka ruling after, bhga after--share, majjha mediocre, ygin assisting in sacrifice, vyajana smaller marks, etc.; cp. pai in same sense. -- (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): dis in each direction, pacha every 5 days, pubba one after the other. -- IV. As one of the contrasting (--comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. 3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddanukhuddaka "small and still smaller", i. e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padanupada, pubbanupubbaka, ponkhanuponkha, buddhanubuddha, vdanuvda, sehanusehi. -- V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu--gijjhati, brheti, sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu--kantati, kassati2, kia, ghati, bujjhati bodha, lokin, vajja.

Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to anu, never elided like adhi = dhi or abhi = bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahanubhva), like nupubbikath (fr. *pubbnupubba), nubhva etc. We find nu also in combn. with an-- under the influence of metre. -- (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv. Anu2 Anu2 (adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for au, e. g. D I.223 Sdhp 271, 346 (anu thla). See au. Anukankhin (adj.) [fr. anu + knk] striving after, longing for J v.499 (piya). Anukantati [anu + kantati2] to cut Dh 311 (hattha = phleti DhA III.484). Anukampaka & ika (adj.) [fr. anukampati] kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity (-- or c. loc.) D III.187; S I.105 (loka), 197; v.157; A IV.265 sq.; It 66 (sabba--bhta); Pv I.33 (= krunika PvA 16), 53 (= atthakma, hitesin PvA 25), 88; II.14 (= anuggahataka PvA 69), 27; ThA 174; PvA 196 (satth sattesu a.). Anukampati [anu + kampati] to have pity on, to commiserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) S I.82, 206; v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv II.16 (= anuddaya karohi PvA 70) & anukampassu Pv III.28 (= anuggaha PvA 181). Med. ppr. anukampamna Sn 37 (= anupekkhamna anugayhamna Nd2 50); PvA 35 (ta), 62 (pitara), 104. -- pp. anukampita (q. v.). Anukampana (nt.) [fr. last] compassion, pity PvA 16, 88. Anukamp (f.) [abstr. fr. anukampati] compassion, pity, mercy D I.204; M I.161; II.113; S I.206; II.274 (loka); IV.323; v.259 sq.; A I.64, 92; II.159; III.49; IV.139; Pug 35. -- Often in abl. anukampya out of pity, for the sake of D III.211 (loka out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitya); J III.280; PvA 47, 147. Anukampita (adj.) [pp. of anukampati] compassioned, gratified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy) Pv III.230. Anukampin (adj.) [cp. anukampaka] compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita full of solicitude for the welfare of S v.86; Sn 693; Pv III.76. sabbapa--bhta--hita id. S IV.314; A II.210; III.92; IV.249; Pug 57, 68. sabba--bhta S I.25, 110; A II.9; It 102. Anukaroti [anu + k] to imitate, "to do after" A I.212; J I.491; II.162; DhA IV.197. -- ppr. anukabba Vin II.201 (mama). -- Med. anukubbati S I.19 = J IV.65. <-> See also anukubba. On anvaksi see anukassati 2. Anukassati [anu + kassati, k] 1. [Sk. anukaati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote D II.255 (siloka). -- 2. [Sk. ava--kaati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Th 1, 869 (aor. anvaksi = khipi, chaddesi C.). Anukma (adj.) [anu + kma] responding to love, loving in return J II.157. Anukra [cp. anukaroti] imitation Dpvs v.39. Anukrin (adj.) imitating Dvs v.32. Anukia [pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv IV.121 (bhamara--gaa). Anukubba (adj.) (--) [= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anukaroti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J II.205

(kicca). Anukubbati see anukaroti. Anukula freq. spelling for anukla. Anukulaka (adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha according to wish). Anukla (adj.) [anu + kla, opp. paikla] favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant VvA 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, 312. --bhava complaisance, willingness VvA 71. --yaa a propitiative sacrifice D I.144 (expld. at DA I.302 as anukula = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan). Anukkahati [an + ukkahati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. anto J v.10; and pp. ita without regret or in plenty PvA 13. Anukkahana (nt.) [an + ukkahana] having no lack anything, being contented or happy J VI.4. Anukkama [to anukkamati] 1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession J I.157, 262, 290; VvA 157; PvA 5, 14, 35 etc. -- 2. that which keeps an animal in (regular) step, i. e. a bridle M I.446; Sn 622 (sandna saha). Anukkamati [anu + kram] 1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) A v.195; It 80 (magga). -- 2. to advance (not with Morris J P T S. 1886, 111 as "abandon") S I.24, Th 1, 194. Anukkhipati [anu + khipati] to throw out Cp. XI.6 (vaa). Anukkhepa [anu + khepa, see anukkhipati] compensation Vin I.285. Anukhaati [anu + khaati] to dig after or further J v.233. Anukhuddaka (adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin II.287 = D II.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144. Anuga (--) (adj.--suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or followed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under the influence of Sn 332 (vasa in the power of), 791 (ej = abhibhta Sn 527), 1095 (Mra<-> vasa = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ej); J III.224 (vasa = vasavattin C.); Mhvs 7, 3. Anugacchati [anu + gacchati] to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) KhA 223; PvA 141 (gacchanto); aor. gamsi Vin I.16, & anvag Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvag Sn 586 (vasa = vasa gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with J I.53; v.370. <-> pp. anugata (q. v.). Anugata (adj.) [pp. of anugacchati] gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with (--), being a victim of, suffering M I.16; D III.85, 173 (paris); A II.185 (sota, v. l. anudhata); J II.292 (samudda); v.369; Nd2 32 (tah); PvA 102 (nma mayha a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala). Anugati (f.) (--) [fr. anu + gam] following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on S I.104 (vas being in the power). Usually in cpd. dihanugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin II.108; S II.203; Pug 33; DhA IV.39.

Anugama [fr. anu + gam] following after, only as adj. in dur difficult to be followed J IV.65. Anugmika (adj.) going along with, following, accompanying; resulting from, consequential on Kh VIII.8 (nidhi, a treasure acc. a man to the next world); J IV.280 (nidhi); Miln 159 (paris); PvA 132, 253 (dna nma a nidnan ti). Anugmin (adj.) [fr. anugacchati] following, attending on; an attendant, follower SnA 453 (= anuyutta). Anugyati [anu + gyati] to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate D I.104, 238; Sn 1131 (anugyissa); Miln 120. Anughati [anu + ghati] to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611. Anugijjhati [anu + gijjhati] to be greedy after, to covet Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 12); J III.207; IV.4 (= giddh gathit hutv allyanti C.). pp. giddh (q. v.). Cp. abhigijjhati. Anugiddha [pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (ananu), 144, 952; Th 1, 580. Anuggaha (adj.) [cp. anuggaha] compassionate, ready to help PvA 42 sla. Anuggahataka (adj.) [= anugganha] compassionate, commiserating, helping PvA 69 (= anukampaka). Anuggahana (nt.) anuggaha1 DhsA 403. [anu + gahti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D I.53 (vca; cp. DA I.160: srato agahato); J II.74; Nd2 50 (ppr. med. gayhamna = anukampamna); Pug 36; PvA 181 (imper. anuggaha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahta (q. v.). Anuggaha1 Anuggaha1 [anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S II.11; III.109; IV.104; v.162; A I.92, 114; II.145; IV.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J I.151; v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104. Anuggaha2 Anuggaha2 (adj.) [an + uggaha] not taking up Sn 912 (= na gahti Nd1 330). Anuggahta (& ita) [pp. of anuggahti] commiserated, made happy, satisfied M I.457; S II.274; III.91; IV.263; A III.172; J III.428. Anugghaka (adj.) [fr. anuggaha] helping, assisting S III.5; V.162; Miln 354 (nt. = help). Anuggheti [an + uggheti] not to unfasten or open (a door) Miln 371 (kava). Anugghta [an + ugghta] not shaking, a steady walk J VI.253. Anugghtin (adj.) [fr. last] not shaking, not jerking, J VI.252; Vv 53 (read for i); VvA 36. Anughyati [anu + ghyati1] to smell, snuff, sniff up Miln 343 (gandha). Anucankamati [anu + cankamati] to follow (along) after, to go after D I.235; M I.227; Th 1, 481, 1044; Caus. peti

M I.253, cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; M Vastu I.350. Anucankamana (nt.) [fr. anucankamati] sidewalk J I.7. Anucarati [anu + cariti] to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anucia & anucarita (q. v.) Anucarita (--) [pp. of anucarati] connected with, accompanied by, pervaded with D I.16, 21 (vmasa = anuvicarita DA I.106); M I.68 (id.); Miln 226. Anucia (pp.) [pp. of anucarati] 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin II.203 = It 86 (pamda); J I 20 (v.126); Th 1, 236; 2, 206; Dpvs IV.9. -- 2. adorned with, accompanied by, connected with J IV.286. Anucintana (nt.) [fr. anucinteti] thinking, upon, intention, care for PvA 164. Anucinteti [anu + cinteti] to think upon, to meditate, consider S I.203 (v. l. for anuvicinteti). Anuccangin see anujjangin. (adj.) [anu + chavi + ka] "according to one's skin", befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, J I.58, 62, 126, 218; II.5; IV.137, 138; Miln 358; DhA I.203, 390; II.55, 56; VvA 68, 78; PvA 13, 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin II.7 (an); III.120 (id. + ananulomika); Miln 13. Anucchiha (adj.) [see ucchiha] (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) J III.257; DhA II.3 (vv. ll. anucciha). Anujagghati [anu + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock D I.91; DA I.258 (cp. sajagghati ibid 256). Anujavati [anu + javati] to run after, to hasten after, to follow J VI.452 (= anubandhati). Anujta (adj.) [anu + jta] "born after" i. e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijta +, opp. avajta); Th 1, 827 (fig. following the example of), 1279; J VI.380; DhA I.129; Dvs II.66. Anujnti [anu + jnti] 1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin IV.225; A II.197; Pv IV.167; PvA 55, 79, 142. -- 2. to advise, prescribe Vin I.83; II.301: Sn 982. <-> grd. anueyya that which is allowed A II.197; pp. anuta (q. v.) Caus. anujnpeti J I.156. Anujvati [anu + jvati] to live after, i. e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by J IV.271 (= upajvati, tassanubhvena jvita laddha (C.). -- pp. anujvata (q. v.). Anujvita (nt.) [pp. of anujvati] living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Sn 836 (= jvita SnA 545). Anujvin (adj.--n.) [fr. anujvati] living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant A I.152; III.44; J III.485; Dvs v.43. Anujju (adj.) [an + ujju] not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. angin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i. e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. Ep. of a beautiful woman J v.40 (= kacana--sannibha--sarr C.); VI.500 (T. anuccang, C. anindit agarahitang); gmin going crooked i. e. snake J IV.330; bhta not upright (fig. of citta) J v.293. Anujjuka = anujju J III.318.

Anujjhna (nt.) [anu + jhna] meditation, reflection, introspection Miln 352 (bahula). Anuta (adj.) [pp. of anujnti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D I.88; J I.92; II.353, 416; Pv I.123 (na a. = ananuta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64 by ananumata); Pug 28; DA I.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81. Anutatta (nt.) [abstr. to anuta] being permitted, permission J II.353. Anuhaka (adj.) [fr. an + uhahati] not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Th 1, 1033. Anuhahati [anu + hahati = thti, see tihati] to carry out, look after, practise do J v.121. -- pp. anuhita (q. v.). Anuhahna (adj.) [ppr. of an + uhahati] one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dh 280 (= anuhahanto avymanto DhA III.409). Anuhtar [n. ag. to an + uhahati] one without energy or zeal Sn 96 (niddslin sabhslin +) SnA 169 (= viriya--tejavirahita). Anuhna (nt.) [an + uhna] "the not getting up", inactivity, want of energy Dh 241 (sarra--paijaggana akaronto DhA III.347). Anuhita [pp. of anuhati = anutihati] practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done D II.103; S IV. 200; A III.290 sq.; IV.300; J II.61; Miln 198; PvA 132 (cp. anugata). Anuhubhati [formally Sk. anuobhati, but in meaning = *anuvati; anu + hubhati, the etym. of which see under nihubhati] to lick up with one's saliva DA I.138. Anuhurin v. l. at SnA 569, see nihurin. Anudasati [anu + dasati] to bite J VI.192. Anudahati [anu + dahati] to burn over again, burn thoroughly, fig. to destroy, consume J II.330; VI.423. Pass. dayhati J v.426. -- Also spelt dahati, e. g. at S IV. 190 = v.53; Th 2, 488. Anudahana (nt.) [fr. anudahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d). Anuata (adj.) [uata] not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Sn 702 (care = uddhacca napajjeyya SnA 492). Anutappati [anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati] to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse J I.113; IV.358; v.492 (ppr. an--anutappa); Dh 67, 314; Pv II.942; DhA II.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted A I.22, 77; III.294, and anutpiya A III.46 (an). Anutpa [fr. anu + tpa] anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaisra VvA 180); DhsA 384. Anutpin (adj.) [fr. anutpa] repenting, regretting Th 2, 57, 190; Vv 21; VvA 115. Anutpiya grd. of anutappati, q. v. Anuteti [anu + taeti] to beat J II.280.

Anutihati [anu + tihati see also anuhahati] to look after, to manage, carry on J v.113 (= anugacchati); PvA 78. Anutre (adv.) [anu + tre, loc. of tra] along side or near the bank (of a river) Sn 18 (= tra--sampe SnA 28). Cp. anu A b. Anuttara (adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Sn 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhvato KhA 193), 1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaibhga DhA I.423); Pv IV.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA I.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc. Anuttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana, paipad, vimutti) at D III.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana, savana, lbha, sikkh, pricariy, anussata) at D III.250, 281; A I.22; III.284, 325 sq., 452; Ps I.5. Cp. M I.235; A v.37. See also nuttariya. Anuttna (adj.) [an + uttna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear J VI.247. Anutthun (f.) [fr. anutthunti] wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 (= vcpalpa vippalpa etc.). Anutthunti [anu + thunati (thunti); anu + stan] to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail D III.86; Sn 827 (cp. Nd1 167); Dh 156; J III.115; v.346, 479; DhA III.133; PvA 60 (wrongly applied for ghyati, of the fire of conscience). Anutrsin (adj.) [an + utrsin] not terrified, at ease Th 1, 864. Anuthera [anu + thera] an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin II.212 (theranuther Th. & next in age). Anudadti [anu + dadti] to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Miln 276, 375. Anudayati (to sympathise with) see under anudd. Anudassita [pp. of anudasseti] manifested Miln 119. Anudahati see anudahati. Anudiha [pp. of anudisati] pointed out, appointed, dedicated, nt. consecration, dedication J v.393 (anudiha = asukassa nma dassat ti C.); Pv I.107 (= uddiha PvA 50). Anudihi (f.) [anu + dihi] an "after--view", sceptical view, speculation, heresy D I.12; M II.228; S III.45 sq.; Th 1, 754; Miln 325; DA I.103. attanudihi (q. v.) a soul--speculation. Anudisati [anu + disati] to point out, direct, bid, address PvA 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi). -- pp. anudiha (q. v.). Anudis (f.) [anu + dis] an intermediate point of ihe compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points D I.222; S I.122; III.124. Anudpeti [anu + dpeti] to explain Miln 227 (dhammadhamma). Anudta [anu + dta] a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin II.19, 295; DhA II.76, 78. Anudeva see anvadeva.

Anuddayat (f.) [abstr. to anudday] sympathy with (--) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par kindness to or sympathy with other people S II.218; v.169 (T. anudayat); A III.184; It 72; Vbh 356. Anudday (& anuday) (f.) [anu + day] compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin II.196; S I.204; II.199; IV.323; A II.176; III.189; Pug 35 (anukamp); J I.147, 186, 214; PvA 70, 88, 181 (= anukamp). In compn anudaya e. g. sampanna full of mercy J I.151, 262; PvA 66. Anudd (f.) [contracted form of anudday] = anudday Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddyan & anuddyitatta "care, forbearance & consideration"; DhsA 362 (anudayat ti anudd). Anuddhaseti [anu + dhaseti] to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin IV.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti v codpeti v to reprove, scold, bring down); It 42. Usually in ster. phrase rgo citta a. lust degrades the heart Vin III.111; M I.26; S I.186; A I.266; II.126; III. 393 sq. -- pp. anuddhasta (q. v.). Anuddhata (adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 (= uddhacca--virahita SnA 549, cp. anuata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA IV.93); Vv 648; Pug 59. Anuddharin (adj.) [an + uddharin] not proud Sn 952 (= anussukin SnA 569) see nihurin. Anuddhasta (adj.) [anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta] spoilt, corrupt, degraded M I.462 (citta); A II.126 (id.). Anudhamma [anu + dhamma] 1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammanudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd. after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu IV. & meaning "the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances see dhamma C. IV. Freq. in phrase dh--anudh--paipanna "one who masters the completeness of the Dh.", e. g. S II.18; III.163; It 81; Ps II.189. -- 2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency, truth; in phrase dhammassa (c) anudhamma vykaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin I.234; D I.161; M I.368, 482; S II.33; III.6; IV.51; V.7. See further M III.30; Sn 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis). Also in cpd. crin living according to the Dhamma, living in truth S II.81, 108; A II.8; Dh 20 (cp. DhA I.158); Vv 317; Sn 69 (see Nd2 51). Anudhammat (f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma A II.46; Ps I.35, 36. Anudhreti [anu + dhreti] to hold up DA I.61 (chatta), cp. J 1.53, dhariyamna. Anudhvati [anu + dhvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M I.474; S I.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253, 372. Anudhvin (adj.--n.) [fr. anudhvati] one who runs after S I.9, 117. Anunad (--tire) along the bank of the river S IV.177 should be read anu nadtre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A). Anunamati [anu + namati] to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Miln 372 (of a bow). Anunaya [fr. anuneti] "leading along", friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning D III.254 (sayojana); A IV.7 sq. (id.) M I.191; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; Nett 79; combd. w. opp. paigha (repugnance) at Miln 44, 122, 322. Anunayana (nt.) [fr. anuneti] fawning DhsA 362. Anunsika (adj.) [anu + ns + ika] nasal; as tt. g. the sound ; in lopa apocope of the nasal VvA 114, 253, 275, 333.

Anunta (adj.) [pp. of anuneti] led, induced S IV.71; Sn 781. Anunetar [n. ag. fr. anuneti] one who reconciles or conciliates Ps II.194 (net vinet anunet). Anuneti [anu + neti] to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter S I.232 (ppr. anunayamna); pp. anunta (q. v.). Anupa see anpa. Anupakampati [anu + pakampati] to shake, move, to be unsteady Th 1, 191 = Ud 41. Anupakkama [an + upakkama] not attacking, instr. ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin II.195. Anupakkuha (adj.) [an + upak] blameless, irreproachahle D I.113; Vin IV.160; Sn p. 115; DA I.281. Anupakkhandati [anu + pa + khandati] to push oneself forward, to encroach on D I.122 (= anupavisati DA I.290); ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin II.88 (= antopavisati), 213; IV.43 (= anupavisati); M I.151, 469; S III.113; Vism 18. Anupakhajjati [den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhandati] to encroach, intrude Vin V.163. Anupagacchati [anu + pa + gacchati] to go or return into (c. acc.) D I.55 (anupeti +). Anupaghta [an + upaghta] not hurting Dh 185 (anpa metri causa; expld. by anupahanana ceva anupaghtana ca DhA III.238). Anupacita (adj.) [anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacinti] heaped up, accumulated ThA 56. Anupacinti [an + upacinti] not to observe or notice J V.339 (= anoloketi C.; v. l. anapaviti). Anupajagghati [anu + pa + jagghati] to laugh at, to deride, mock over A I.198 (v. l. anusa). Anupajjati [anu + pad] to follow, accompany J IV.304. <-> pp. anupanna (q. v.). Anupacha (adv.) [anu + pac + aha] every five days PvA 139 (+ anudasha). Anupaatti (f.) [anu + paatti] a supplementary regulation or order Vin II.286; V.2 sq. Anupaipti (f.) [anu + paipti] succession; as adv. in order, successively DA I.277 (kath = anupubbikath); DhA III.340 (anupaipiy = anupubbena); Vism 244. Anupahita (adj.) [anu + pa + hita] setting out after, following, attacking J V.452. Anupatati [anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J VI.555 anupatiysi Subj.). -- 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin III.106 = M I.364; S I.23 (read patanti for patatanti) = Dh 221 (dukkh); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). <-> pp. anupatita (q. v.). Cp. also anupta & anuptin. Anupatita [pp. of anupatati] "befallen", affected with, oppressed by (--) S II.173 (dukkha); III.69 (id.); Sn 334 (pamda). Anupatitatta (nt.) [abstr. of anupatita] the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of (--) SnA 339.

Anupatta (anuppatta) [pp. of anupputi; cp. Sk. anuprpta] (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached D I.87--111; II 2; It 38; Sn 027, 635; Dh 386, 403; Pv IV.166; PvA 59 (dukkha), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo--anuppatta having reached old age, e. g. Vin II.188; D I.48; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. Anupatti (anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S I.46, 52. Anupathe at J V.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga--mahmaggna antare. Anupada [cp. Sk. anupada adv., anu + pada] 1. the "afterfoot", i. e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting, where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin IV.15 (cp. 355); Miln 340 (anupadena anupada katheti). -- 2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step, continuous, repeated, in dhamma--vipassan uninterrupted contemplation M III.25; vaan word--by--word explanation DhsA 168. As nt. adv. close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) J II.230 (tassanupada agamsi); VI.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padanupada (adv.) foot after foot, i. e. in the footsteps, immediately behind J III. 504; VI.555; DhA I.69; II.38. Anupadtar (anuppadtar) [n. ag. of anupadeti] one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs D I.4 (cp. DA I.74); A II.209. Anupadna (anuppadna) (nt.) [anu + pa + dna, cp. anupadeti] giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of (--) D I.12 (cp. DA I.98; both read anuppdna); J III.205; Miln 315. Anupadinna (anuppadinna) [pp. of anupadeti] given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv I.512. Anupadeti (anuppadeti) [anu + pa + dadti] to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake S III.131 (Pot. anuppadajju); M I.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya. see dadti I.3); Miln 210 (deti). fut. dassati (see dadti I.1); D III.92; S IV.303 (v. l. SS for T. anusarissati); A III.43; Sn 983. ger. datv SnA 35. inf. dtu A I.117. pp. dinna (q. v.). Anupaddava (adj.) [an + upaddava] free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin II.79 = 124 (+ antika); III.162; Dh 338; DhA IV.48; PvA 250 (expln. for siva). Anupadhreti [an + upadhr] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA IV.197; VvA 260. Anupadhika (adj.) [an + upadhi + ka] free from attachment (see upadhi) Vin I 36 (anupadhka); D. III 112 (anupadhika opp. to sa--upadhika); Sn 1057 (anpadhka T., but Nd2 anpadhika. with for u metri causa). [pp. of anupajjati] gone into, reached, attained Sn 764 (mradheyya). Anupabandhati (anuppa) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Miln 132. -- Caus. peti ibid. Anupabandhanat (anuppa) (f.) [abstr. to prec.] nonstopping, not ceasing Miln 132. Anupabandhan (anuppa) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of upanha). Anupabbajj (f.) [anu + pabbajj, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S V.67 = It 107.

Anupaya (adj.) [an + upaya] unattached, "aloof" S I.181 (akankha apiha +). Anuparigacchati [anu + pari + gacchati] to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin III.119; S I.75 (ger. gamma); Sn 447 (aor. pariyag = parito parito agamsi Sn A 393); J IV.267. Anuparidhvati [anu + pari + dhvati] to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S. III.150 (khlan). Anupariyti [auu + pari + yti] to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin II.111; S I.102, 124; Th 1, 1235 (pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search); Pv III.34 (= anuvicarati); Miln 38; PvA 92 (yyitv, ger.) 217. Anupariyya (adj) [adjectivised ger. of anupariyti] going round, encircling, in patha the path leading or going round the city D II.83 = S IV 194 = A V.195; A IV.107. Anuparivattati [anu + pari + vt] to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin III.307 (dicca); D I.240; PvA 97. -- 2. to meet Miln 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti). -- 3. to move round & round, move on and on, keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S. III.150 (anuparidhvati +) Miln 253 (anudhvati + kyan). Anuparivatti (f.) (--) [anu + parivatti] dealing with, occupation, connection with S III.16. Anuparivreti [anu + pari + vreti] to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin I.338; M I.153; DhA 1.55. Anupariveiya [anu + pariveiya = loc. of parivei] should be written anu pariveiya ("in every cell, cell by cell"), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A) Vin I.80, 106. Anuparisakkati [anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S IV.312 (v.l. vattati). Anuparisakkana (nt.) [fr. anuparisakkati] dealing with, interest in S IV.312 (v.l. vattana). Anupariharati [anu + pari + harati] to surround, enfold, embrace M I.306. Anupalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta] unsmeared, unstained, free from taint M I.319, 386 (in verse); as palitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Sn 211 (= lepna abhv SnA 261), 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353. Anupavajja (adj.) [grd. of an + upavadati] blameless, without fault, Miln 391. Anupavattaka (anuppa) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakka) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka. Anupavatteti (anuppa) [anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vt] to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakka to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor S I.191; Miln 362. See also anuvatteti. Anupavda [an + upavda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anpa in metre; expld at DhA III.238 as anupavdana c'eva anupavdpana ca "not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj. vdaka Pug 60, & vdin M I.360. Anupaviha (anuppa) [pp. of anupavisati] entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Miln 270, 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); PvA 97, 152 (Gangnadi a. nad: flowing into the G.).

Anupavihat (f.) [abstr. to anupaviha] the fact of having entered Miln 257. Anupavisati [anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh I.290; VvA 42 (= oghati). -- pp. paviha (q.v.) <-> Caus. paveseti (q.v.). Anupavecchati (anuppa) [see under pavecchati] to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin I.221 (pavacchati); D I.74 (= pavesati DA I.218); II.78; M I.446; III.133; A II.64; III.26 (v.l. vacch); J V.394; Sn 208 (v.l. vacch); SnA 256 (= anupavesati); PvA 28. Anupaveseti [anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveayati Divy 238] to make enter, to give over, to supply SnA 256 (= pavecchati). Anupasankamati1 Anupasankamati1 [anu + pa + sakamati] to go along up to (c. acc.) PvA 179. Anupasankamati2 Anupasankamati2 [an + upasank] not to go to. not to approach DhA II.30 (+ apayirupsati). Anupasahapan (f.) [an + upasahapan] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandan instead); cp. anupabandhan. Anupassaka (adj.) [fr. anupassati] observing, viewing, contemplating Th 1, 420. Anupassati [anu + passati] to look at, contemplate, observe Sn 477; Ps I.57, 187; Sn A 505. Anupassan (f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S V.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps I.10, 20, 96; II.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.; Vbh 194. See anicca, anatta, dukkha. Anupassin (--) (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S II.84 sq., V.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255, 728; Ps I.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411. Anupahata1 Anupahata1 [anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han] thrown up, blown up Miln 274. Anupahata2 Anupahata2 (adj.) [an + upahata] not destroyed, not spoilt DhA II.33 (jivhapasda). Anupta [of anupatati] attack in speech, contest, reproach A I.161 (vda). Anuptin (adj.) [fr. anupta] 1. following, indulging in J III.523 (khaa). -- 2. attacking, hurting J V.399. Anupda (adv.) [anu + pda] at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anussa at the head). Anupd [ger. of an + updiyati = anupdya] anupdniya, anupdya, anupdiyna, anupdiyiv see updiyati.

Anupdna & Anupdi see updna & updi. Anuppita [pp. of anuppeti] having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Miln 252. Anupputi (anupp) [anu + pputi] to reach, attain, get to, find S I.105; ger. anuppatvna Pv II.924 (= ppuitv PvA 123). -- pp. anupatta (q. v.). -- Caus. anuppeti (q. v.). Anuppeti [Caus. of anupputi] to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find J VI.88; Cp. XI. 4 (aor. anuppayi); Miln 276. -- pp. anuppita (q. v.). Anupya [an + upya] wrong means J I.256; Sdhp 405. Anupysa see upysa. Anuplaka (adj.) [anu + plaka] guarding, preserving Sdhp 474. Anuplana (nt.) [fr. anupleti] maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs III.2. Anupleti [anu + pleti] to safeguard, warrant, maintain Miln 160 (santati). Anuphana (adj.) [an + uphana] without shoes J VI.552. Anupiya (anuppiya) (adj) [anu + piya] flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in bhin one who flatters I) III.185; J II.390; V.360; and bhitar id. Vbh 352. Anupa at PvA 161 is to be read anuppan at PvA 161 is to be read anuppan (q. v.). Anupucchati [anu + pucchati] to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Sn 432, 1113. -- pp. anupuha (q. v.). Anupuha [pp. of anupucchati] asked Sn 782 (= pucchita SnA 521). Anupubba (adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin II.237 (mahsamuddo a--ninno etc.); D I.184; Sn 511; J V.155 (regularly formed, of r). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin I.83; Dh 239 (= anupaipiy DhA III.340); Pug 41, 64; J II.2, 105; III.127; Miln 22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anuprvaa) in regular order Sn 1000. <-> In compn. both anupubba & anupubbi (q. v.). --kraa gradual performance, graded practice M I.446. --nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under vihra, & are enumd. as such at D III.266, 290; A IV.409, 456; Ps I.35. --vihra a state of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhnas, the 4 yatanni & as the crowning phrase "sa--vedayitanirodha" (see jhna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp. at the foll.: D II.156; III.265, 290; A IV.410; Nd2 under jhna; Ps I.5; Miln 176. --sikkh regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) M I.479; III.1 (+ kiriy paipad). Anupubbaka (adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbanupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B IV.) Vin I.20 (na kulna putt the sons of each clan, one by one). Anupubbata (nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukla kiriy i. e. as it pleases VvA 280) cp. nupubbat.

Anupubbi--kath (f.) [anupubba + kath, formation like dhammi--kath] a gradual instruction, graduated sermon, regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dna--kath, sla, sagga, magga) i. e. charity, righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikath nma dnanantara sla slanantaro saggo sagganantaro maggo ti etesa dpana--kath" (DA I.277). Vin I.15, 18; II.156, 192; D I.110; II.41; M I.379; J I.8; VvA 66, 197, 208; DA I.308; DhA I.6; Miln 228. -- The spelling is frequently nupubbikath (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e. g. at D I.110; II.41; M I.379; J I.8; Miln 228. Anupekkhati [anu + pekkhati] 1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully A III.23. -- 2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. amna = anukampamna). -- Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin II.73. Anupekkhanat (f.) [abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupekkhat] concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, 85, 284, 372. Anupeti [anu + pa + i] to go into D I.55 (+ anupagacchati) S III.207; DA I.165. Anupeseti [anu + pa + i] to send forth after Miln 36. Anuposathika see anvaddhamsa. Anuposiya (adj.) [grd. of anu + pu] to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318. Anuppa in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa. Anuppadajju (S III.131) see anupadeti. Anuppanna (uppda, uppdeti) see uppanna etc. Anuppa (adj.) [an + uppa] not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm J III.443; V.378; VvA 351; PvA 161. Anupharaa (nt.) [anu + pharaa] flashing through, pervading Miln 148. Anuphusyati [anu + phusyati, cp. Sk. pruyati, Caus. of pru] to sprinkle, moisten, make wet J V.242 (hima; C. pateyya). Anubajjhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q. v.). Anubaddha [pp. of anubandhati] following, standing behind (pihito) D I.1, 226. Anubandha [anu + bandh] bondage M III.170; It 91. Anubandhati [anu + bandhati] to follow, run after, pursue J I.195; II.230; VI.452 (= anujavati); PvA 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. bandhi J II.154, 353; III.504; PvA 260 (= anvgacchi). ger. bandhitv J I.254. grd. bandhitabba M I.106. -- pp. anubaddha (q. v.). Anubandhana (nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J VI.526 (dukkha). Anubala (nt.) [anu + bala] rear--guard, retinue, suite, in bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln 125.

Anubujjhati [anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. avabudhyate] to remember, recollect J III.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse). Anubujjhana (nt.) [fr. anubujjhati] awakening, recognition Ps I.18 (bujjhana +). Anubuddha [pp. of anu + bodhati] 1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known D II.123 ( ime dhamm); S I.137 (dhammo vimalen anubuddho) II.203; IV.188; A II.1; III.14; IV.105; SnA 431. In phrase buddhanubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B IV.) either "fully awakened (enlightened)" or "wakened by the wake" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Th 1, 679 = 1246. -- 2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DA I.40. Cp. buddhanubuddha. Anubodha [anu + budh] awakening; perception, recognition, understanding S I.126 (?) = A V.46 (anubodhi as aor. of anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S II.92; III.261; V.431; A II.1; IV.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D I.12, 22; S I.136. Anubodhati [anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhi A V.46 (?) = S I.126 (anubodha). -- Caus. bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J VI.139 (ayamna) -- pp. anubuddha (q. v.). Anubodhana (nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding, recognition Ps I.18 (bodhana +). Anubbajati [anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) J IV.399 (magga = pabbajati C.). Anubbata (adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J III.521; VI.557. Anubbillvitatta see ubbill. Anubyajana see anuvyajana. Anubrhita [pp. of anubrheti] strengthened with (--), full of Ps I.167. Anubrheti [brheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S I.178 (anubrhaye); M III.187 (id., so read for manu), Th 2, 163 (ehi); Cp. III.12 (savega anubrhayi aor.); J III.191 (sugra). Often in phrase viveka anubrheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. J I.9 (inf. brhetu); III.31 (brhessmi), Dh 75 (brhaye = brheyya vaddheyya DhA II.103). -- pp. anubrhita (q.v.) Cp. also brhana. Anubhaan (f.) [anu + bhaana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin II.88 (anuvadan +). Anubhavati & Anubhoti [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in, experience D I.129; II.12 (bhonti); M II.204; A I.61 (attha bhoti to have a good result); J VI.97 (bhoma); Pv I.1011 (bhomi vipka); PvA 52 (issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkha to suffer pain, e.g. PvA I.1110 (bhonti); PvA 43, 68, 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana). -- ppr. med. bhavamna J I.50; aor. bhavi PvA 75 (sampatti); ger. bhavitv J IV.1; PvA 4 (sam<-> patti), 67 (dukkha), 73 (sampatti); grd. bhaviyna (in order to receive) Pv II.85 (= anubhavitv PvA 109). <-> Pass. anubhyati & bhavyati to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. bhyamna PvA 8, 159 (may a. = anubhta), 214 (attan by him) & bhavyamna PvA 33 (dukkha). -- pp. anubhta (q.v.). Anubhavana (nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Nett 28 (ihanih--anubhavana--lakkhan vedan "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita--lakkha vedan anubhavana--lakkha ca); PvA 152 (kamma--vipka). Esp. in combn. with dukkha suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J IV.3; Miln 181; DhA IV.75; PvA 52.

Anubhga [anu + bhga] a secondary or inferior part, (after--)share, what is left over Vin II.167. Anubhyati [anu + bhyati] to be afraid of J VI.302 (kissa nv anubhyissa, so read for kissanu). Anubhva [fr. anubhavati] orig. meaning "experience, concomitance" and found only in cpds. as --, in meaning "experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with", e.g. maha sensation of greatness, rja s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i. e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhva as "power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc." & as such it was separated from the 1st component and taken as nubhva with instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (nubhva abs.) found only in later language. -- (1) anubhva (--): mahnubhva (of) great majesty, eminence, power S I.146 sq.; II.274; IV.323; Sn p. 93; Pv II.112; PvA 76. deva of divine power or majesty D II.12; devat id. J I.168; dibba id. PvA 71, 110. rj kingly splendour, pomp D I.49; J IV 247; PvA 279 etc. --anubhvena (instr. --) in accordance with, by means of J II.200 (angavijj); PvA 53 (iddh), 77 (kamma), 148 (id.), 162 (rja), 184 (dna), 186 (pua). yathanubhva (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power S I.31; Vv 15 (= yathbala VvA 25). -- (2) nubhva majesty power, magnificence, glory, splendour J V.10, 456; Pv II.811; VvA 14; PvA 43, 122, 272. See also nu. Anubhvat (f.) [= anubhva + t] majesty, power S I.156 (maha). Anubhsati [anu + bhsati] to speak after, to repeat D I.104; Miln 345; DA I.273. Anubhta [pp. of anubhavati] (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed PvA II.1218. nt. suffering, experience J I.254; Miln 78, 80. Anubhyamnatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati] the fact of having to undergo, experiencing PvA 103. Anuma (--dassika) see anoma. Anumagge at J V.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc. (see anu A b). Anumajjati [anu + majjati] 1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DA I.276 (= anumasati). -- 2. to beat, thresh, fig. to thresh ont J VI.548; Miln 90. -- Pass. anumajjyati Miln 275 (cp. p. 428). Anumajjana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anumajjati] threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicra (q.v.) Miln 62; DhsA 114; DA I.63, 122. Anumajjha (adj.) [anu + majjha] mediocre, without going to extremes J IV.192; V.387. Anumaati [anu + maati] to assent, approve, give leave Th 1, 72. -- pp. anumata (q.v.). Anumata [pp. of anumaati] approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave D I.99 (= anuta DA I.267); J V.399 (= muta); Miln 185, 212, 231, 275; PvA 64 (= annuta). Anumati (f.) [from anumaati] consent, permission, agreement, assent, approval Vin II.294, 301, 306; D. I.137, 143; Dpvs IV.47, Cf. V.18; DA I.297; VvA 17, PvA 114. Anumatta see au. Anumasati [anu + masati] to touch D I.106 (= anumajjati DA I.276).

Anumna [fr. anu + man] inference Miln 330 (naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74. Anumitta [anu + mitta] a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance J V.77. Anuminti [cf. Sk. anumti, anu + minti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots m & mi] to observe, draw an inference M I.97; PvA 227 (anto + naya nento). See also anumyati. Anumyati [Sk. anumyate, Pass. of anu + m, measure, in sense of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S III.36. Cp. anuminti. Anumodaka (adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin V.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512. Anumodati [anu + modati] to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin II.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); S II.54; A III.50 (modanya); IV.411; Dh 177 (ppr. modamna); It 78; Pv II.919 (dna modamna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajt honti PvA 27); J II.112; PvA 19, 46, 81, 201) imper. modhi); Sdhp. 501 sq. -- pp. anumodita (q.v.). Anumodana (nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): datv PvA 89; katv J I.91; DhA III.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17, 47; vatv VvA 40 (pnyadne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp. further DhA I.198 (gth verses expressing thanks, benediction); II.97 (Satthra ycisu asked his blessing); PvA 23 (attha in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta), 142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516. Anumodita [pp. of anumodati] enjoyed, rejoiced in PvA 77. Anummatta (adj.) [an + ummatta] not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Miln 122; Sdhp 205. Anuyanta at A V.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta). The meaning is either "inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal" or "attending on". The explanation may compare Sk. anuyta attendance [anu + y, cp. anuyyin] or Sk. yant ruler [yam], in which latter case anu--yant would be "an inferior ruler" and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yant as a--stem. The v. l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2). Anuygin (adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D I.142. Anuyta [pp. of anuyti] gone through or after, followed, pursued S II.105 (magga); A V.236; It 29; Miln 217. [anu + y] 1. to go after, to follow J VI.49 (fut. yissati), 499 (yyanta anuyyati = anugacchati C). -- 2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Miln 391 (yyati). -- pp. anuyta (q. v.). See also anusayyati. Anuyyin (adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyyin, anu + y] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (ananuyyin); J VI.309; Miln 284. Anuyujan (f.) (& yujana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyujati] application or devotion to (--) Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjana wrong spelling?) Anuyujati [anu + yujati] 1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue S I.25, 122 (yujan "in loving self--devotion" Mrs. Rh. D.); III.154; IV.104, 175; Dh 26 (pamda = pavatteti DhA I.257), 247 (surmeraya--pna = sevati bahulkaroti DhA III.356); PvA 61 (kammahQa). -- 2. to ask a question, to call to account, take to task Vin II.79;

Vv 335; ppr. Pass. yujiyamna PvA 192. -- pp. anuyutta (q. v.). -- Caus. anuyojeti "to put to", to address, admonish, exhort DhA IV.20. Anuyutta [pp. of anuyujati] 1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon D I.166, 167; III. 232 = A II.205 (attaparitpan anuyoga a.); S III.153; IV.104; Sn 663 (lobhague), 814 (methuna = samyutta SnA 536), 972 (jhn); Pug 55; PvA 163 (jgariya), 206. -- 2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior, vassal, in expression khattiya or rj anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) A V.22 (v l. for T. anuyanta, q. v.); Sn 553 (= anugmin, sevaka SnA 453). Anuyoga [Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj] 1. application, devotion to (--), execution, practice of (--); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase anuyoga anuyutta = practising, e. g. Vin I.190 (madan anuyoga anuyutta); D III.113 (attakilamath anuyoga a.); A II.205 (attaparitpan anuyoga a.). -- As adj. (--) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). D I.5; III.107; M I.385; S I.182; III.239; IV.330; V.320; A I.14; III.249; IV.460 sq.; V. 17 sq., 205; J I.90 (padhn anuyogakicca); Vv 8438 (dhamma); Miln 348; DA I. 78, 104. -- 2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyujati 2) Miln 10 (cariyassa datv). Anuyogavant (adj.) [anuyoga + vant] applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted PvA 207. Anuyogin (adj.) [fr. anuyoga] applying oneself to, devoted to (--) Dh 209 (atta given to oneself, self--concentrated). Anurakkhaka (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati, cp. rakkhin] preserving, keeping up J IV.192 (vasa); VI.1 (id.). Anurakkhaa (nt.) & (f.) [abstr. fr. anurakkhati] guarding, protection, preservation D III.225 sq.; A II.16 sq.; J I.133; Pug 12; Dpvs IV.24 (adj.); VvA 32 (citta); Sdhp 449. Anurakkhati [anu + rakkhati] to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Sn 149; Dh 327; J I.46; Pug 12. -ppr. med. rakkhamna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621. Anurakkh (f.) [= anurakkha] guarding, protection, preservation S IV.323 (anudday a. anukamp). Anurakkhin (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati] guarding, preserving, keeping J V.24. Anurakkhiya (adj.) [f. anurakkhati] in dur difficult to guard Vin III.149. Anurajita [pp. of anu + rajeti, Caus. of raj] illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu I.45 (bymapabh by the shine of the halo); VvA 4 (sajhtapa for sajhpabh). Anuratta (adj.) pp. of anu + raj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Th 2, 446 (bhattra); J I.297; Miln 146. Anuravati [anu + ravati] to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Miln 63. Anuravan (f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63. Anuraho (adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M I.27. Anurujjhati [Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh] to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased A IV.158; Dhs A 362. -- pp. anuruddha (q. v.). Anuruddha [pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S IV.71, (annuruddha). Anurpa (adj.) [anu + rpa] suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with (--) J

I.91; VI.366 (tad); PvA 61 (ajjhsaya according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also pairpa in same meaning. Anurodati [anu + rodati] to cry after, cry for J III.166 = Pv I.127 (drako canda a.). Anurodha [fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satisfaction (opp. virodha) S I.111; IV.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; DhsA 362. Anulapan (f.) [anu + lapan, lap] scolding, blame, accusation Vin II.88 (spelt anullapan; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaan). Anulitta (adj.) [cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati] anointed, besmeared J I.266; PvA 211. Anulimpati [anu + limpati] to anoint, besmear, Miln 394 (limpitabba). Caus. limpeti in same meaning Miln 169, and lepeti Milm 169 (grd. lepanya to be treated with ointment). -- pp. anulitta (q. v.). Anulimpana (nt.) [fr. anulimpati] anointing Miln 353, 394. Anulepa [fr. anu + lip] anointing Miln 152. Anulokin (adj.) [fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi] looking (up) at, seeing (--) M I.147 (ssa). Anuloma (adj.) [Sk. anu + loma] "with the hair or grain", i. e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable, straight forward D II.273 (annuloma, q. v.) S IV.401; Ps II.67, 70; DhA II.208. -- nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Miln 148. --a insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) DhA II.208. --pailoma in regular order & reversed, forward & backward (Ep. of paiccasamuppda, also in BSk.) Vin I.1; A IV.448. Anulomika (& ya) (adj.) [fr. anuloma] suitable, fit, agreeable; in proper order, adapted to (--) Vin II.7 (an); III.120 (an = ananucchaviya); IV.239; A I.106; III.116 sq.; It 103 (smaassa); Sn 385 (pabbajita); KhA 243 (ananulomiya); DhsA 25; Sdhp 65. Anulometi [v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372. Anuratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. an + ura] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24. Anuvajja (adj.) [grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvda & Sk. avavadya] to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Sn p. 78 (an = anuvdavimutta SnA 396). Anuvattaka (adj.) [fr. anuvatteti] 1. = anupavattaka (q. v.) Th 1, 1014 (cakka). -- 2. following, siding with (--) Vin IV.218 (ukkhittanuvattik f.). Anuvattati [Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati] 1. to follow, imitate, follow one's example (c. acc.), to be obedient D II.244; Vin II.309 (Bdhgh.); IV.218; J I.125, 300; DA I.288; PvA 19. -- 2. to practice, execute Pv IV. 712. -- Caus. vatteti (q. v.). Anuvattana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with (--), compliance, observance, obedience J I.367 (dhamma); V.78. Anuvattin (adj.) [fr. anuvattati] following, acting according to or in conformity with (--), obedient J II.348 (f. in); III.319 (id.); Dh 86 (dhamma); Vv 155 (vasa = anuklabhvena vattana sla VvA 71); DhA II.161.

Anuvatteti [anu + vatteti] = anupavatteti (q. v.) Th 1, 826 (dhammacakka: "after his example turn the wheel" Mrs. Rh. D.). Anuvadati [Sk. ava; anu + vadati] to blame, censure, reproach Vin II.80, 88. -- grd. anuvajja (q. v.). Anuvadan (f.) [fr. anuvadati] blaming, blame, censure Vin II.88 (anuvda +). Anuvasati [anu + vasati] to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit J II.421. Caus. vseti to pass, spend (time) J VI.296. -pp. vuttha (q. v.). Anuvassa (adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24. Anuvassika (adj.) [fr. anuvassa] one who has (just) passed one rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by" Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2). Anuvceti [anu + Caus. of vac] to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again D I.104 (= tehi aesa vcita anuvcenti DA I.273); Miln 345. Cp. anubhseti. Anuvta1 Anuvta1 [anu + v to blow] a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paivta). A I.226 (paivta); Sdhp 425 (paivta). In anuvte (anu + vte) at J II.382 "with the wind, facing the w., in front of the wind" anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc. & to be separated from vte (see anu A b.). Anuvta2 Anuvta2 [anu + v to weave (?) in analogy to vta from v to blow] only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus'garments (cvara) "weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam", i. e. hem, seam, binding Vin I.254, 297; II.177; IV.121 (aggala +); PvA 73 (anuvte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient). Anuvda [fr. anuvadat, cp. Sk. anuvda in meaning of "repetition"] 1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin II.5, 32; A II.121 (atta, para); Vbh 376. -- 2. in combn. vdanuvda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i. e. "small talk" (see anu B IV.) D I.161; M I.368. --adhikaraa a question or case of censure Vin II.88 sq.; III.164 (one of the 4 adhikarani, q. v.). Anuvsana (nt.) [fr. anuvseti] an oily enema, an injection Miln 353. Anuvseti [anu + vseti, Caus. of vsa3 odour, perfume] to treat with fragrant oil, i. e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Miln 169; grd. vsanya ibid.; pp. vsita Miln 214. Anuvikkhitta (adj.) [anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati] dispersed over S V.277 sq. (+ anuvisaa). Anuvigaeti [anu + vi + gaeti] to take care of, regard, heed, consider Th 1, 109. Anuvicarati [anu + vi + carati] to wander about, stroll roam through, explore D I.235; J II.128; III.188; PvA 189 (= anupariyti). -- Caus. vicreti to think over (lit. to make one's mind wander over), to meditate, ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q. v.) A I.264 (cetas), III.178 (dhamma cetas a.). -- pp. anuvicarita (q. v.). Anuvicarita [pp. of anuvicreti] reflected, pondered over, thought out S III.203 (manas); DA I.106 (= anucarita).

Anuvicra [anu + vicra, cf. anuvicreti] meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicra). Anuvicinaka [fr. anu + vicinti] one who examines, an examiner Miln 365. Anuvicinteti [anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D II.203; S I 203 (yoniso cintaya, imper. "marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhamma aya); J III.396; IV.227; V.223 (dhamma cintayanto). Anuvicca [ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu--v--icca for anvicca), cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati] having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out M I.301, 361 (v. l. vijja); A II.3, 84; V.88; Dh 229 (= jnitv DhA III.329); Sn 530 (= anuviditv SnA 431); J I.459 (= jnitv C.); III.426; Pug. 49. --kra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin I.236 (here spelt anuvijja) = M I.379 (= viditv C.) = A IV.185. Anuvijjaka [fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati] one who finds out, an examiner Vin V.161. Anuvijjati [anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)] to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf. vijjiti J III.506; ger. viditv Sn A 431, also vijja & vicca (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable M I.140 (Tathgato ananuvejjo). -- Caus. anuvijjpeti to make some one find out J V.162. -- pp. anuvidita (q. v.). Anuvijjhati [anu + vyadh] 1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) J VI.439 -- 2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur DhA III.380 (apardha). -- pp. anuviddha (q. v.). Anuvitakketi [anu + vi + takketi] to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicreti D I.119; III.242; S V.67 = It 107 (anussarati +); A III.383. Anuvidita [pp. of anuvijjati] found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Sn 528, 530 (= anubuddha Sn A 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. M Vastu III.398. Anuviddha (adj.) [pp. of anuvijjhati] pierced, intertwined or set with (--) VvA 278. Anuvidhyati [cf. Sk. anuvidhyate & adj. anuvidhyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dh, cf. vidahati] to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) M II.105 = Th 1, 875; S IV.199; J II.98; III.357. Anuvidhyan (f.) [abstr. fr. anuvidhyati] acting according to, conformity with M I.43. Anuviloketi [anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati] to look round at, look over, survey, muster M I.339; Sn p. 140; J I.53; Miln 7 (laka), 21 (parisa), 230. Anuvivaa [anu + vivaa] an "after--evolution", devolution; as part of a bhikkhus dress: a sub--vivaa (q. v.) Vin I.287 (vivaa +). Anuvisaa (anu + visaa, pp. of anu + vi + s] spread over S V.277 sq.; J IV.102. Anuvuttha [pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anita] living with, staying, dwelling J II.42 (cira); V.445 (id.). Anuvejja (adj.) in an see anuvijjati.

Anuvyajana & anubyajana (e. g. Vin IV.15; J I.12) (nt.) [anu + vyajana] accompanying (i. e. secondary) attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahpurisa--lakkhaa) Vin I.65 (abl. anuvyajanaso "in detail"); M III.126; S IV.168; A IV.279 (abl.); V.73 sq.; Pug 24, 58; Miln 339; VvA 315; DhsA 400. --ghin taking up or occupying oneself with details, taken up with lesser or inferior marks D I.70 (cf. MVastu III.52); III.225; S IV.104; A I.113; II.16, 152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351). Anusayyati [anu + sa + yyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M I.209 (Bhagavanta itv), J IV.214 (v.l. anuyyitv). See also anuyti and anusati. Anusavacchara (adj.) [anu + sav] yearly DhA I.388 (nakkhatta). Usually nt. as adv. yearly, every year J I.68; V.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a. Anusacarati [anu + sa + carati] to walk along, to go round about, to visit M I.279; S V.53, 301; J I.202; III.502; PvA 279 (nagara). -- pp. anusacarita (q. v.). Anusacarita [pp. of anusacarati] frequented, visited, resorted to Miln 387. Anusaceteti [anu + sa + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12. Anusati [either anu + sa + j (jnti) or (preferably) = anusayti as short form of anusayyati, like anuyti > anuyyati of anu + sa + y, cf. Sk. anusayti in same meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med. sayamna Vin III.43 (kammante); inf. satu A I.68. (janapade). Anusaa [Sk. anusta, pp. of anu + s] sprinkled with (--), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma magga = vippakia VvA 36). Anusatthar [n. ag. to anu + ss, cf. Sk. anusit & P. satthar] instructor, adviser J IV.178 (cariya +). Cp. anussaka. Anusatthi (f.) [Sk. anusti, anu + s, cp. anussana] admonition, rule, instruction J I.241; Miln 98, 172, 186 (dhamma), 225, 227, 347. Anusandati [Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Miln 63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A IV.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati. Anusandahati [anu + sa + dh, cf. Vedic abhi + sa + dh] to direct upon, to apply to A IV.47 sq. (citta sampattiy; so to be read with v. l. for anusandati); Miln 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.). Anusandhanat (f.) [= anusandhi] application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa). Anusandhi (f.) [fr. anu + sa + dh] connection, (logical) conclusion, application DA I.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucch, ajjhsay, yath); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index "complete cessation"?!). Esp. freq. in (Jtaka) phrase anusandhi ghaeti "to form the connection", to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim J I.106; 308; DhA II.40, 47; etc. Anusampavankat (f.) [anu + sa + pavankat; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin II.88 (under anuvdadhikaraa). Anusaya [anu + , seti Sk. anuaya has a diff. meaning] (see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545; M. III.31; S. III.130,

IV.33, V.28 236; A. I.44; II.157; III.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhihnabhinivesanusay) S. II.17; III.10, 135, 161; A. V.III. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at S. I.188; II.252 ff., 275; III.80, 103, 169, 253; IV.41, 197; A I.132, IV.70 doubt at M. I.486 -- ignorance lust and hatred at S IV.205, M III.285. At D III.254, 282; S V.60; and A IV.9. we have a list of seven anusaya's, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence--forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps I.26, 70 ff., 123, 130, 195; II.36, 84, 94, 158; Pug 21; Vbh 340, 383, 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dpvs I.42. Anusayita [pp. of anuseti, anu + ] dormant, only in combn. dgharatta latent so long Th 1, 768; Sn 355, 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin. Anusayin (adj.) [fr. anusaya] D II.283 (me dgharatta), "for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain. Anusarati [anu + s] to follow, conform oneself to S IV. 303 (phala anusarissati BB, but bala anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred). -- Caus. anusreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Miln 36 (aamaa a. anupeseti). Anusavati at S II.54 (sav na a.; v. l. anusayanti) & IV. 188 (akusal dhamm na a.; v. l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2. Anusahagata (adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of . . S III.130; Kvu 81, see au. Anusyika (adj.) [fr. anusaya] attached to one, i. e. inherent, chronic (of disease) M II.70 (bdha, v. l. BB anussyika); DhA I.431 (roga). Anusra [fr. anu + s] "going along with", following, conformity. Only in obl. eases (--) anusrena (instr.) in consequence of, in accordance with, according to J I.8; PvA 187 (tad), 227; and anusrato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91. Anusrin (--) (adj.) [fr. anu + sarati] following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after. Freq. in formula dhammanusrin saddhanusrin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith D III.254; M I.142, 479; S III.225; V.200 sq.; A I.74; IV.10; Pug 15. -- Cp. also S I.15 (bhavasota); IV.128 (id.); J VI.444 (paditassa = veyyvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha). Anusreti see anusarati. Anussaka [fr. anussati] adviser, instructor, counsellor J II.105; Miln 186, 217, 264. Cp. anusatthar. Anussati [Vedic anusati, anu + ss] 1. to advise, admonish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin I.83; D I.135; II.154; Dh 77, 159 (aa); J VI.368; cp. I.103; Pv II.68; PvA 148. -- grd. anussiya Vin I.59; and ssitabba DhA III.99. -- Pass ssiyati Vin II.200; Miln 186. -- 2. to rule, govern (acc.) dminister to (dat.) S I.236 = Sn 1002 (pahavi dhammenam--anussati, of a Cakkavattin); J II.2; VI.517 (rajjassa = rajja C., i. e. take care of) DA I.246 (read ssantena); PvA 161 (rajja). -- pp. anusiha (q. v.); cp. anusatthar, anusatthi & ovadati. Anussana (nt.) [Vedic anusana, fr. anu + s] advice, instruction, admonition D III.107; A I.292 (pihriya, cp. anussan); Miln 359. Anussan (f.) [fr. anussati, cp. anussana] instruction, teaching, commandment, order S V.108; A II.147; III.87; V.24 sq., 49, 338; J V.113; Th 2, 172, 180; Pv III.76; ThA 162; VvA 19, 80, 81. --pihriya (anussani) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha) Vin II.200; D I.212, 214; III.220; A I.170; V.327; J III.323; Ps II.227 sq.

Anusikkhati [Vedic anuikati; anu + Desid. of ak] to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one's example, to imitate Vin II.201 (ppr. med. amna); S I.235; A IV. 282, 286, 323; Sn 294 (vatta, cp. RV III.59, 2: vratena ikati), 934; J I.89; II.98; III.315; V.334; VI.62; Th 1, 963; Miln 61. -- Caus anusikkhpeti to teach [= Sk. anuikayati] Miln 352. Anusikkhin (adj.) [fr. anusikhati] studying, learning M I. 100; Dh 226 (ahoratta = div ca ratti ca tisso sikkh sikkhamna DhA III.324). Anusiha (Vedic anuia, pp. of anussati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded M II.96; J I.226; Pv II.811; Miln 284, 349. Anusibbati [anu + sibbati, siv to sew] to interweave Vin III.336 (introd. to Sam. Ps.). Anusuti [anu + ru] to hear; pret. anassu [Sk. anvaruva] I heard M I.333. Anusumbhati [anu + sumbhati (sobhati); ubh or (Vedic) umbh] to adorn, embellish, prepare J VI.76. Anusuyya [cp. Sk. anasya] reading at J III.27, see anasuyya. Anusuyyaka (adj.) [an + usuyyaka] not envious, not jealous Sn 325 (= usuyyvigamena a. SnA 332); J II.192 (v. l. anussuyyaka); V.112. Anusehi [anu + sehi] 1. an under--sehi (banker, merchant) J V.384 (see anu B III. a.). -- 2. in redupl. cpd. sehanusehi (see anu B IV) "bankers & lesser bankers", i. e. all kinds of well--to--do families J VI.331. Anuseti [anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuayate or ete, from ] to "lie down with", i. e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) S II.65; III.36; IV.208. -- 2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. M I.40, 108, 433; S II.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti) IV.188; A I.283; III.246; Pug 32, 48. -- pp. anusayita (q. v.). Anusocati [anu + socati] to mourn for, to bewail Sn 851 (atta na a.; cp. Nd1 222); Pv I.127; II.68; PvA 95. Anusocana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anusocati] bewailing, mourning PvA 65. Anusota [anu + sota, in as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.] in anusota (adv.) along the stream or current, down--stream A II.12; J I.70 (opp. paisota against the stream); PvA 169 (Gangya a. gacchanto). --gmin "one who follows the stream", i. e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will A II.5, 6 (opp. pai); Sn. 319 (= sota anugacchanto Sn A 330); Pug 62. Anussati (f.) [Sk. anusmti, fr. anu + sm, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati--hnni, viz. Buddha, Dhamma, Sangha, sla, cga, devat, i. e. proper attention to the Buddha, the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods. Thus at D III.250, 280 (cp. A I.211); A III.284, 312 sq., 452; V.329 sq.; Ps I.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus npna--sati, maraa--sati, kyagat--sati, upasamanussati) at A I.30, 42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D I.81; S V.67 = It 107 (anussaraa at latter pass.); A III.284, 325, 452. Ps I.48, 95, 186; Pug 25, 60; Dhs 14, 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr. to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat--anuttariya). Anussada (adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Sn 624 (vv. ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Sn A 467 expln. by tah ussadabhva) = Dh 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l. K.B. anussada; DhA IV.165 expls. with tah--ussvabhva, vv. ll. ussada); It 97 (vv. ll. anussata & anussara). Anussaraa (nt.) [abstr. to anussarati] remembrance, memory, recollection It 107 (= anussati at id. p. S V.67); PvA 25,

29. Anussarati [Vedic anusmarati, anu + sm] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D II.8, 53, 54 (jtito etc.); S III.86 sq. (pubbenivsa); V.67 (dhamma a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassa); A I.25, 164 (pubbenivsa), 207 (Tathgata, Dhamma etc.); III.285 (id.), 323 (nivsa), 418; V.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyamitte); It 82 (dhamma), 98 (pubbenivsa); J I.167; II.111; Dh 364; Pv I.59; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA I.257; KhA 213; DhA II.84; IV.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. -- pp. anussarita (see anussaritar). -- Caus anussarpeti to remind someone, to call to mind J II.147. Anussaritar [n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati] one who recollects or remembers S V.197, 225 (saritar +); A V.25, 28. Anussava [anu + sava fr. ru, cp. Vedic ravas nt.] hearsay, report, tradition M I.520; II.211; S II.115; IV.138; A I.26; J I.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav'atthe nipto; so also at VvA 322, cf. anussavana); II.396, 430 (id.); IV.441; instr. ena from hearsay, by report A II.191 (cf. itihtiha). Anussavana (nt.) [anu + savana fr. ru] = anussava PvA 103 (kira--saddo anussavane, from hearsay). Anussavika (adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay M I.520; II.211. Cp. anussutika. Anussvaka [fr. anussveti] one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavc) Vin I.74. Anussvana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. anussveti] a proclamation Vin I.317, 340; V.170, 186, 202 sq. Anussvita [pp. of anussveti] proclaimed, announced Vin I.103. Anussveti [anu + sveti, Caus. of ru, cp. B.Sk. anurvayati "to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal" Av. I.102; II.182] to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim, utter, speak out Vin I.103 (ssviyamna ppr. Pass.); II.48 (sadda a.). -- pp. anussvita. Anussuka (adj.) [an + ussuka] free from greed Dh 199; cf. anussukin v. l. D III.47, also anissukin and apalsin. Anussukita [an + ussuk] VvA 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka. Anussuta1 Anussuta1 (adj.) [an + ussuta, ud + s] free from lust Dh 400 (= ussvavena anussuta C.). See also anussada. Anussuta2 Anussuta2 [anu + suta, pp. of ru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S II.9; Pug 14. Anussutika (adj.) [fr. anu + ru, cp. anussavika] according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DA I.106, 107. Anussuyyaka see anusuyyaka. Anuhasati [anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA I.256.

Anuhrati [for hariyati, anu + h] to be held up over, ppr. anuhramna D II.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram; glosses B. K. anudhriyam, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79). Anna (adj.) [Vedic anna, an + na] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J VI 273; Dpvs V.52; Miln 226; DA I.248 (+ paripra, expld by anavaya). Dpvs IV.34. Annat (f.) [abstr. fr. anna] completeness Cp. III.611. Anpa (adj.) [Vedic anpa, anu + ap: see pa, orig. alongside of water] watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. IV.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (khetta); Miln 129 (khetta). Anpaghta [metrically for anupa] not killing, not murdering. Dh 185 (= anupahanana ceva anupaghtana ca DhA III.238). Anpadhika for anu in metre Sn 1057, see upadhi. Anpanhin (adj.) [an + upanhin, with metri causa] not bearing ill--will, not angry with J IV.463. Anpama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama). Anpalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta, with in metre] free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353; cf. Nd1 90 and DhA IV.72. Anpavda [an + upavda, with metrically lengthened u] not grumbling, not finding fault Dh 185 (= anupavdana c eva anupavadpana ca DhA III.238). Anhata (adj.) [pp. of an + haati, ud + han] not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Dh 338 (= asamucchinna DhA IV.48). Aneka (adj.) (usually --) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It 99 (savaakapp countless aeons); Sn 688 (skh); Dh 153 (jtisra); J IV.2; VI.366. --pariyyena (instr.) in many ways Vin I.16; Sn p. 15. --rpa various, manifold Sn 1049, 1079, 1082; Nd2 54 (= anekavidha). --vidha manifold Nd2 54; DA I.103. --vihita various, manifold D I.12, 13, 178; It 98; Pug 55; DA I.103 (= anekavidha). Anekas (f.) [an + ekas] doubt Nd2 1. Anekasikat (f.) [abstr. fr. anekasa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln 93. AneQa (adj.) [an + ej] free from desires or lust D II.157; Sn 920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejanuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh 414 (= tahya abhvena DhA IV. 194), 422; Pv IV.135 (nittaha PvA 230). Anedha (adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J IV.26 (=anindhana). Anea (adj.) [an + ea = ena, see nea & cp. BSk. eda (mka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DA I.282, viz. elagalana--virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vc speech: "clearly enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings I.241) Vin I.197 = D I.114 = S I.189; A II.51, 97; III.114, 195. Cp.

also M Vastu III. 322. -- mga same as prec. "having a clear throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D III.265; Sn 70 (= allmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259. Aneaka (adj.) [cp. BSk. anedaka, e. g. Av. . I.187, 243; M Vastu I.339; III.322] = anea, pure, clear M II.5; J VI.529. Anesan (f.) [an + esan] impropriety S II.194; J II.86; IV.381; Miln 343, 401; DA I.169; DhA IV.34; Sdhp 392, 427. Ano-- is a frequent form of compn. an--ava, see ava. Anoka (nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S V.24 = A V.232 = Dh 87 (ok anoka gamma). <-> adj. homeless, free from attachment S I.176; Dh 87 (= anlaya DhA II.162); Sn 966 (adj.; expld at Nd1 487 by abhisankhra--sahagatassa viassa oksa na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisankhra--vin dna anoksabhta). srin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S III.10 = Nd1 197; Sn 628 (= anlaya--crin SnA 468); Ud 32; Dh 404 (v. l. anokka); DhA IV.174 (= anlaya--crin); Miln 386. Anogha in anogha--tia see ogha. Vv 354 (= VvA 161, where classed with yodhik bandhujvak). Anojagghati at D I.91 is v. l. for anujagghati. Anoj (f.) [*Sk. anuj] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J VI.536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J I.9 (dma, a garland of a flowers); VI.227 (id.); DhA II.116 (cangoaka). Anottappa (nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D III.212; It 34 (ahirika +); Pug 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottpin. Anottpin & Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D III.252, 282 (pp; ahirika); Sn 133 (p; ahirika +); It 27, 115 (anatpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottpin); Pug 20, 24. Anodaka (adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J I.307; DhA I.52; Sdhp 443. Anodissaka (adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. vasena universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mett) J I.81; II 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka--vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1. Anonamati [an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA II.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D II.17 = III. 143; anonami--dada (for anonamiya) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoami T, but anonami vv. ll., see Miln 427). Anopa see anpa. Anoma (adj.) (only --) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds. --gua supreme virtue DA I.288. --dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma); Vv 437. --dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J I.228. --nma of perfect name S I.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). --nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripua--viriyatya a. VvA 284). --paa of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (= mahpaa SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripua--paa ThA 296), DhA I.31. --vaa of excellent colour Sn 686 J VI.202. --viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353.

Anomajjati [anu + ava + majjati, mj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattni pin a. to rub over one's limbs with the hand M I.80, 509; S V.216. Anorapra (adj.) [an + ora + pra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln 319. Anoramati [an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J III.487; DhA III.9 (ger. itv continually). Anovassa (nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarana] absence of rain, drought J V.317 (v. l. BB for anvvassa T.; q. v.). Anovassaka (adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin II.211; IV.272; J I.172; II.50; III.73; DhA II. 263; ThA 188. Anosita (adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of s] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn 937 (= anajjhosita Nd1 441; jardhi anajjhvuttha hna SnA 566). Anta1 Anta1 [Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant--; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the starting--point)]. 1. end, finish, goal S IV.368 (of Nibbna); Sn 467; J II.159. anta karoti to make an end (of) Sn 283, 512; Dh 275, cp. antakara, kiriy. -- loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J I.203 (vijay). -- 2. limit, border, edge Vin I.47; Dh 305 (van); J III.188. -- 3. side: see ekamanta (on one side, aside). -- 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as "constituent, principle" (in tayo & cattro ant; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekanta extremely, under anta2): dve ant (two extremes) Vin I.10; S II.17; III.135. ubho ant (both sides) Vin I.10; S II.17; J I.8; Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo ant or principles(?), viz. sakkya, s.--samudaya, s.--nirodha D III.216, cp. A III. 401; as cattro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s.--nirodhagmini--paipad at S III.157. Interpreted by Morris as "goal" (J P T S. 1894, 70). -- Often pleonastically, to be expld as a "pars pro toto" figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea--side, country--side); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh 305; Pv II.310 (expld by vana PvA 86; same use in BSk., vananta e. g. at Jtm VI.21; cp. also grmanta Av. . I.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ksanta J VI.89 & the pleonastic use of patha. --ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta2. --ananta end & no end, or finite and endless, D I.22; DA I.115. --anantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness and infinitude D I.22 (see expln. at DA I.115); S III.214, 258 sq.; Ps I.155. --kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhassa. (of the Buddha) M I.48, 531; A II.2; III.400 sq.; Th 1, 195; It 18; Sn 32, 337, 539; Pug 71. In other combn. A II.163 (vijjy); Sn 1148 (pahn). -- --kiriy putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S IV.93; lt 89; Sn 454, 725; DhA IV.45. --gata = antag Nd2 436 (+ koigata). --ghik (f.), viz. dihi, is an attribute of micchdihi, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either "holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)", viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo ant (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or "taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist", or "wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2)" (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin I.172; D III.45, 48 (an); S I.154; A I.154; II.240; III.130; Ps I.151 sq. --g one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A IV.254, 258, 262; Sn 401 (= vaadukkhassa antagata); 539. --ruddhi at J VI.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). --vai rimmed circumference J III.159. --sain being conscious of an end (of the world) D I.22, cp. DA I 115. Anta2 Anta2 (adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anaca, see ks anaca and vianaca); D I.23, 34 = D III.224, 262 sq.; Sn 468 (paa); Dh 179, 180 (gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA III.197); J I.178. -- 2. extreme, last, worst J II.440 (C. hna, lmaka); see also anta1 4. -- acc. as adv. in

ekanta extremely, very much, "utterly" Dh 228 etc. See eka. Anta3 Anta3 (nt.) [Vedic ntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It 89; J I.66, 260 (vaddhi--masa etc.); Vism 258; DhA I.80. --gahi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin I.275 (bdha). --gua [see gua2 = gula1] the intestinal tract, the bowels S II.270; A IV.132; Kh III. = Miln 26; Vism 42; KhA 57. --mukha the anus J IV.402. --vai = gua Vism 258. Antaka [Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Mra Vin I.21; S I.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65 as lmaka va Mra, thus taken = anta2); Dh 48 (= maraa--sankhto antako DhA II.366), 288 (= maraa DhA III.434). Antamaso (adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaah; cp. BSk. antaah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even") Av. . I.314; Divy 161] even Vin III. 260; IV.123; D I.168; M III.127; A V.195; J II.129; DA I.170; SnA 35; VvA 155. Antara (adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e)/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner"; in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antara difference. I. (Adj.--n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It 83 (tayo antar mal three inward stains); esp. as -- in cpds. mis with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin I.303; dos with anger inside, i. e. angry Vin II.249; D III.237; M I.123; PvA 78 (so read for des). Abl. antarato from within It 83. (b) in between, distant; dvdasa yojan antara hna PvA 139 139. -- 2. In noun--function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (ptantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = ptavaa uttariya VvA 116); Dvs I.10 (dp antara--vsin living on the island); DhA I.358 (kaa--chidd the inside of the ear; VvA 50 (kacch inner room or apartment). Therefore also "space in between", break J V.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara--dhyati (for antara dhyati). -- (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantara the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It 121 (etasmi antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv I.1011 (dgha antara = dgha kla PvA 52); PvA 5 (etasmi antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J V.287; Pug 55 (eaka--m--antara occasion of getting rain). S I.20, quoted DA I.34, (ma ca ta ca ki antara what is there between me and you?) C. expls. ki kra. Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 "of me it is and thee (this talk) -- now why is this"; J VI.8 (assa antara na passisu they did not see a diff. in him). -- 3. Phrases: antara karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. "to make a space in between" M III.14; J. IV.2 (katv leaving behind); Pug A 231 (ummra a. katv staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanni a. katv at a distance of 10 y. PvA 139. -- (b.) to remove, destroy J VI.56 (v. l. BB. antarya karoti). II. In prep. use (--) with acc. (direction) or loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaraghara paviha gone into the house Miln 11. -- (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisdanti (inside the house) Vin II.213; dpake in the centre of the island J I.240; dvre in the door J V.231; magge on the road (cp. antarmagge) PvA 109; bhatte in phrase ekasmi yeva a. during one meal J I 19 = DhA I.249; bhattasmi id. DhA IV.12; vthiyan in the middle of the road PvA 96. satthsu between the thighs Vin II.161 (has antar satthna) = J I.218. III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between D I.56; S IV.59, 73; J I.393; PvA 13 (kl in a little while, na klantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA I.63, 358. -loc. antare in, inside of, in between (-- or c. gen. KhA 81 (sutt in the Sutta); DhA III.416 (mama a.); PvA 56, 63 (rukkh). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen.) KhA 57; DhA I.59 (vanasadassa a.). -- abl. antar (see also sep. article of antar) in combn. antarantar from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn p. 107; DhA II.86; IV.191; PvA 272. IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J IV.139; Miln 382 (solQ; DhA I.397; PvA 63 (tadantara immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.

--atta gone past in the meantime J II.243. --kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D I 54. --kraa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 --cakka "the intermediate round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln 178. --cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S IV.173. --bhira (adj.) inside & outside J I.125. --bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara--raha) Vin III.47 --raha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J V.135. --vsa an interregnum Dpvs V.80. --vsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sangh, uttarsanga & a.) Vin I.94, 289; II.272. Cf. next. --saka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA 166 (q. v.). Antarasa [B.Sk. antarasa; antara + asa] "in between the shoulders", i. e. the chest J V.173 = VI.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihat antaraso). Antarahaka (adj.) [antara + ahaka] only in phrases rattisu antarahaksu and antarahake hima--ptasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see ahaka2). First phrase at Vin I.31, 288; III 31; second at M I.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta--rahaka); A I.136 (in nom.); J I.390; Miln 396. Antaradhna (nt.) [fr. antaradhyati] disappearance A I.58 (saddhammassa); II.147; III.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871. Cp. dhyana. Antaradhyati [antara + dhyati] to disappear Sn 449 (dhyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J I.119 = DhA I.248; DhA IV.191 (ppr. dhyamna & aor. dhyi) PvA 152, 217, (dhyi), 245; VvA 48. -- ppr. antarahita (q. v.). -- Caus. antaradhpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J I.147; II.415; PvA 123. Antaradhyana (nt.) [fr. antaradhyati] disappearance DhA IV.191. (v. l. adhna). Antarayati [cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in between, ger. antaritv (= antarayitv) J I.218. Antarahita (adj.) [pp. of antaradhyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D I.222. M I.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. -- 2 in phrase anantarahitya bhmiy (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin I.47; II.209; M II.57. Antar (adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antar.] prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (--) and adv. "in between" (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA I.34 sq. -- (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antar ca Divy 94 etc.) D I.1 (antar ca Rjagaha antar ca Nanda between R. and N.). -- c. gen. & loc. Vin II.161 (satthna between the thighs, where id. p. at J I.218 has antara--satthsu); A II.245 (satthna. but v. l. satthimhi). -- (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh 237. -- occasionally Miln 251. -- (3). (pref.) see cpds. --kath "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D II.1, 8, 9; S I.79; IV.281; A III.167; Sn p. 115; DA I.49 and freq. passim. --gacchati to come in between, to prevent J VI.295. --parinibbyin an Angmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D III.237; A I.233; Pug 16. --magge (loc.) on the road, on the way J I.253; Miln 16; DhA II.21; III.337; PvA 151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara). --maraa premature death DhA I.409; PvA 136. --muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin II.167. Antarpaa (nt.) [antar + paa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J I.55; VI.52; Miln 1, 330; DhA I.181. Antarya1 Antarya1 [antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (--); prevention, bar; danger,

accident to (--). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin I.112, 169 etc., viz. rja, cora, aggi, udaka, manussa, amanussa, va, sirisapa, jvita, brahmacariya. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rj--caura--manuy--amanuya--vyd--agny--udaka. -- D I.3, 25, 26; A III.243, 306; IV.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 (= jvit DhA III.431); J I.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA II 52; VvA 1 = PvA 1 (hat removing the obstacles) --antarya karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin I.15; J VI.171; Vism 120; PvA 20. --kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D I.227; S I.34; A I.161; Pv IV.322. Antarya2 Antarya2 (adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn 1120 (cp Nd2 58) = antar Sn A 603. Antaryika (adj.) [fr. antarya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin I.94 = II.272; M I.130; S II.226; ThA 288. Antaryikin (adj.--n.) [cp. antaryika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin IV.280 (an = asati antarye). Antara (nt.) [Sk antarla] interior, interval Dvs I.52; III.53 (nabh). Antarika (adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. <-> 1. intermediate, next, following: see an. -- 2. distant, lying in between PvA 173 (aneka--yojan hna). See also f. antarik. -- 3. inside: see antarik. --anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin II.165, 212 (n); IV.234. Antarik (f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near", i. e. -- 1. the inside of Vin IV.272 (bhjan). <-> 2. the neighbourhood, region of (--), sphere, compass Vin III.39 (ur, angul); J I.265 (yakkhassa sm inside the y sphere of influence). -- 3. interval, interstice Vin II.116 (sutt in lace); A I.124 (vijj the interval of lightning). Antalikkha (nt.) [Vedic antarika = antari--ka (ki), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D II.15; A III.239; IV.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104; Pv I.31 (= vehyasa--saita a. PvA 14); KhA 166. --ga going through the air A I.215. --cara walking through the air Vin I.21; D I.17; S I.111; J V.267; DA I.110. Antavant (dj.) [anta1 + vant] having an end, finite D I.22, 31, 187; Ps I.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145. --anantavant endless, infinite A V.193 (loka). See also loka. Anti (indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a)nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and--, Ger. ant--, ent--] adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite, near J V.399 (tav anti gat, read as tav anti--m--gat; C. santika), 400, 404; VI.565 (smikass anti = antike C.). -- Cp. antika. Antika (adj.--n.) --1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh VIII.1. (odak); J VI.565 (antike loc. = anti near). -- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S I.130 (puris etad--antik, v. l. SS antiy: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons. Antima (adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in combn. with deha & sarra, the last body) D II.15; Dh 351; It 50 (antima deha dhreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512; Sn 478 (sarra antima dhreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarr antima--dhrin); Sdhp 278. --dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhra T, dhara v. l.); VvA 163. --dhrin = prec. S I.14, 53 (+ khsava); II.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. --vatthu "the last thing", i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin I. 121, 135, 167, 320. --sarra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S I.210 (Buddho a--sarro); A II.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400; DhA IV.166 (= koiya hito attabhvo).

Ante (pref.) [Sk. anta, with change of --a to --e, instead of the usual --o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: pura (nt.) "inner town", the king's palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antapura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin I.75, 269; A V.81; J II.125; IV.472; Miln 1; PvA 23, 81, 280; purik harem woman DhsA 403; vsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin I.60; III.25; S I.180; IV.136; J I. 166; II.278; III.83, 463; PvA 12; VvA 138; vsin = vsika Vin III.66; D I.1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M III.116; DA I.36. Anto (indecl.) [Sk. anta; Av antar Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside] prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (--) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesana gata gone into the house J I.158; anto jla pavisati go into the net DhA III.175; anto gma pavisati to go into the village DhA II.273; anto nagara pavisati DhA II.89; PvA 47. -- (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe J II.182; gme DhA II.52; gehe DhA II.84; nadiya J VI.278; nivesane J II.323; vasse in the rainy season J IV.242; vimnasmi Pv I.101; satthe inside of a week PvA 55. --koisanthra "house of the Golden Pavement" J IV.113. --gadha (gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. --jana "the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) D III.61 (opp. to servants); A I.152; J VI.301; DA I.300. --jla the inside of the net, the net DhA IV.41. --jlikata "in--netted", gone into the net D I.45; DA I.127. --nijjhna inner conflagration PvA 18. --nimugga altogether immersed D I.75; A III.26. --parisoka inner grief Ps I.38. --pura = antepura J I.262. --mano "turning ones mind inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin III.19. --bhavika being inside Miln 95. --rukkhat being among trees J I.7. --vasati to inhabit, live within S IV.136. --vaajanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J V.118. --vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA 66. --vihra the inside of the V. DhA I.50 (abhimukh turning towards etc.), --samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). --soka inner grief Ps I.38. Andu [cp. Sk. andu, and & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin I.108 = III.249 (ti); D I.245; J I.21 (ghara prisonhouse); DhA IV.54 (bandhana). Andha (adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J I.216 (dhm); Pv IV.148; PvA 3. -- dark, dull, blinding M III.151 (andha adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andha tama); DhA II.49 (vana dark forest). -- 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D I.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (vei, reading & meaning uncertain); A I.128; Th 2, 394 (= bla ThA 258). See cpds. karaa, kra, bla, bhta. --kula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= pacakkhuno abhvena VvA 337). --karaa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraa); Miln 113 (paha, + gambhra). --kra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin I.16; D II.12; A I.56; II.54; III.233; J III.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (= avijj VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA I.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161; PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. --tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S V.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andha tama); J VI.247. --bla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J I.246, 262; VI.337; DhA II.43, 89; III.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. --bhta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S IV.21; A II.72; J VI.139 (spelled bta); Dh 59, 174 (= pa--cakkhuno abhvena DhA III.175). --vesa "blind form", disguise J III.418. Andhaka [fr. andha] "blind fly", i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad--fly Sn 20 (= ka--makkhikna adhivacana SnA 33). Anna (nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummsa, sattu, maccha, masa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aa in combns apar aa and pubb aa. Under dhaa (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubb aa: sli, vhi, yava, godhma, kangu, varaka, kudrsaka) and boiled, prepared food (apar aa: speyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn 403) expls. anna by ygubhattadi. -- D I.7; A I.107, 132; II.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J III.190; Pug 51; Sdhp 106, 214. --pa food & water Sdhp 100. --da giving food Sn 297. --pna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn 485, 487; Pv I.52, 82; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43. Annaya in dur see anvaya.

Anvaksi 3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Th 1, 869 (= khipi, chaddesi C.). Anvakkhara (adj.) [anu + akkhara] "according to the syltable", syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin IV.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupada. Anvag 3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annag J V.258. Anvag 3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati S I.39; Sn 586. Anvaddhamsa (adv.) [anu + addha + msa] every fortnight, twice a month M II.8; Vin IV.315 (= anuposathika); DhA I.162; II.25. Anvattha (adj.) [anu + attha] according to the sense, answering to the matter, having scnse ThA 6 (sabhva). Anvadeva (adv.) [anva--d--eva with euphonic d.; like sammad--eva corresponding to Sk. anvag--eva] behind, after, later D I.172; M III.172; S V.1 (spelt anudeva); A I.11; V. 214; It 34. Anvaya (n.--adj.) [Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvya] 1. (n.) conformity, accordance D II. 83 = III.100; M I.69 (dhamm logical conclusion of); S II.58; D III.226 (anvaye a); Pv II.113 (tassa kammassa anvya, v. l. BB anvaya & anvya; accordingly, according to = paccay PvA 147); PvA 228 (anvayato, adv. in accordance). -- 2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with (--) D I.46 (tad); M I.238 (kyo citt acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind); Sn 254 (an inconsistent); It 79 (tass). -- dur spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dh 92 (gati = na sakk papetu DhA II.173); Sn 243, 251 (= duvipaya SnA 287 dunneyya ibid. 293). Anvayat (f.) [abstr. to anvaya] conformity, accordance M I.500 (ky giving in to the body). Anvaha (adv.) [anu + aha] every day, daily Dvs IV.8. Anvgacchati [anu + + gacchati] 1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvgacchi Pv. IV.56 (= anubandhi PvA 260). -- 2. to come back again J I.454 (ger. gantvna). -- pp. anvgata (q. v.). Anvgata [pp. of anvgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J IV.385; V.4. Anvdisati [anu + + disati] to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. dishi Pv II.26 (= uddissa dehi PvA 80); III.28 (= disa PvA 181). Anvdhika (adj.) [derivation uncertain] a tailoring term. Only at Vin I.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts II.232) by half and half; that is a patchwork, half of new material, half of old. Bdhgh's note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up. Anvmaddati [anu + + maddati] to squeeze, wring J III. 481 (galaka anvmaddi wrung his neck; vv. ll. anvnumai & anvvamaddi; C. gva maddi). Anvya [ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya] undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through, after D I.13 (tappa by means of self--sacrifice), 97 (savsa as a result of their cohabitation); J I.56 (buddhi), 127 (piyasavsa), 148 (gabbhaparipka). Often in phrase vuddhi anvya growing up, e. g. J I.278; III. 126; DhA II.87. Anvyika (adj.--n.) [fr. anvya] following; one who follows, a companion D III.169; Nd2 59; J III.348.

Anvrohati [anu + + rohati] to go up to, visit, ascend J IV.465 (aor. anvruhi). Anvvassa at J V.317 should be read with v. l. BB as anovassa absence of rain. Anvviha [pp. of anvvisati] possessed (by evil spirits) S I.114. Anvvisati [anu + + visati] to go into, to take possession of, to visit M I.326; S I.67; Miln 156. -- pp. anvviha (q. v.). Cp. adhimuccati. Anvsatta [pp. of anu + + saj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta] clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to A IV.356 (v. l. anvhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvsanna q. v.). See also foll. Anvsattat (f.) [abstr. fr. anvsatta] being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to DhA I.287 (in same context as anvsatta